JP6646632B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game using a game medium.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is fired into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area (also referred to as a “start winning”), a predetermined value is obtained. Some prize balls are paid out to players. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuations”) identification information when a game medium wins in a specific winning area (also referred to as a “starting area”) is provided. Depending on the display result of the variable display of the information, it is configured such that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player or to a predetermined state (small hitting gaming state) different from the advantageous state. is there.

  The advantageous state means an advantageous state for a player to whom a predetermined game value has been given. More specifically, the advantageous state is, for example, a state in which the special variable winning means is changed to a state in which the game medium is likely to win (a jackpot game state), or a state in which a right to a state advantageous to the player is generated. And a state in which a predetermined game value (for example, the number of acquired prize balls, etc.) is given, such as a state in which the condition for giving away prize game media is easily satisfied. The predetermined state is a state that is advantageous to the player as in the advantageous state, but is a state in which the degree of profit is relatively lower than the advantageous state (small hitting gaming state).

  In such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display device that displays a symbol as identification information becomes a display mode (big hit symbol) indicating a "big hit", for example, a special winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the gaming medium is opened. It shifts to an advantageous state (big hit game state) where it is easy to win a prize, and in each opening period, there is a prize in a predetermined number (for example, 10) of large winning prize openings, or when a predetermined opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, a large prize is obtained. The winning opening will be closed. Further, when the display result of the variable display device becomes a display mode (small hit symbol) indicating "small hit", for example, an advantageous state (small hit gaming state) in which the large winning opening is opened once and the game medium can win. The special winning opening is closed when a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.8 seconds) elapses.

  Also, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines have a frequency (for example, small hit occurrence frequency per unit time) controlled to a predetermined state (small hit game state) in a state (special state) in which the frequency is higher than a normal state. Some can be controlled. For example, Patent Literature 1 describes that in a special state (KT state), the frequency of transition to the small hitting game state is improved as compared with the normal state, which is advantageous to the player.

JP-A-2014-30634 (paragraphs 0074 and 0268)

  By the way, in the gaming machine controllable in the special state (KT state) described in Patent Literature 1, display relating to the game value (for example, the number of winning prize balls) obtained by the player in the special state is performed. The performance in the special state requires further improvement in order to enhance the interest of the game.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can control a game machine in a special state and that can improve the performance and enhance the interest of the game.

(Means A) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that variably displays identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player and a predetermined state advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state. State control means capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state more advantageous than the non-special state, specific display means capable of displaying a specific display relating to the provided game value, and control in the special state. In the variable display at the time, a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying the result of the variable display, a variable means capable of entering a game medium when controlled to a predetermined state, and controlled to a predetermined state Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in response to the game medium entering the variable means when the variable state is present, wherein the advantageous state includes a specific advantageous state and a special advantageous state having different degrees of advantage. The state control means may include, as the special state, a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous than the first special state and that is more easily controlled to a predetermined state than the non-special state, so that a game value is easily provided. The specific display means, when being controlled to the second special state, displays a specific display relating to the game value given in accordance with the second special state, and controls the second special state. When the display is controlled to the specific advantageous state, the specific display is ended, and when the display is controlled to the special advantageous state when the display is controlled to the second special state, the specific display is continued. Executes a predetermined notification effect for notifying that the vehicle is controlled to the predetermined state as the notification effect when being controlled to the predetermined state in the variable display when being controlled to the second special state; Controlled by In the variable display at the time of being controlled to the predetermined state, the predetermined notification effect is not executed as the notification effect, and when the variable display at the time of being controlled to the second special state is controlled to the special advantageous state. In addition, a predetermined effect is performed in common with the predetermined notification effect, and the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect when controlled to the predetermined state while being controlled to the second special state, and controls to the first special state. If a predetermined state is controlled while the game is being performed, the predetermined effect is not executed.
(Means B) In the means A, a variable starting means capable of changing the state between an easy-to-enter state in which the game medium easily enters and a difficult-to-enter state in which the game medium hardly enters, and a variable startable state capable of controlling the state of the variable starting means. Starting means control means, and the variable means is provided downstream of the variable starting means, and the variable starting means control means includes a non-specific opening pattern, and the game medium flows down to the variable means more than the non-specific opening pattern. The state of the variable starting means can be controlled by a specific opening pattern which is easy to operate, and when the state is controlled to the first special state, the state of the variable starting means is controlled by a non-specific opening pattern rather than the specific opening pattern. When the ratio is high and the second special state is controlled, the state in which the state of the variable starting means is controlled in the specific opening pattern is higher than that in the non-specific opening pattern.
(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that variably displays identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player, and is a non-special state (for example, a non-special state). KT state) and state control means (for example, steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2209B in the game control microcomputer 560) which can be controlled to be more advantageous than the non-special state (for example, the KT state). A part for executing S2214B) and a specific display means (for example, steps S976C, S976G, S976K, S976L in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of displaying a specific display relating to the provided game value (for example, the number of winning balls). Part), and the advantageous state has a specific advantage having a different degree of advantage. A state (for example, 16R normal big hit) and a special advantageous state (for example, sudden big hit) are included, and when the special display means is controlled to the special state, the game value given according to the special state is given. A specific display (for example, a specific payout display 82) is displayed, and when the display is controlled to the special state, the specific display is terminated when the display is controlled to the specific advantageous state. When the display is controlled to the special state, the display is specially advantageous. When the state is controlled, the specific display is continued (for example, see FIGS. 70 (4) to (7)). According to such a configuration, the continuation / end of the specific display changes according to the type of the advantageous state, so that the effect can be improved in a gaming machine that can be controlled to the special state, and the interest of the game in the special state can be improved. Can be improved.

  (Means 2) In the means 1, the state control means may include, as special states, a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) which is more advantageous than the first special state. A variable starting device (e.g., an easily accessible state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can easily enter, and a state in which the state of the game medium is difficult to enter (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult to enter (e.g., a closed state) , A variable winning ball device 15), a predetermined variable device (eg, a special variable winning ball device 22) provided downstream of the variable starting device and through which game media can enter, a non-specific opening pattern, and the non-specific opening. A variable starter control means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 560) capable of controlling the state of the variable starter with a specific opening pattern in which the game medium flows more easily to the predetermined variable device than the pattern. 15 (1) and (2), the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state for 5.5 seconds or 0.2 seconds as shown in FIGS. 1 When being controlled to the special state, the variable starting device is easily controlled in a non-specific opening pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 15A, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds). This makes it difficult for the game medium to enter the predetermined variable device, and when controlled in the second special state, the variable starting device is easily controlled in the specific opening pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 15 (2)). In addition, the variable winning prize ball device 15 is opened for only 0.2 seconds) so that the game medium can easily enter the predetermined variable device. According to such a configuration, the degree of advantage of the special state can be changed by the opening pattern of the variable starting device, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. Display executing means (for example, a part for executing steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560) and variable pattern selecting means for selecting a variable display variable pattern (for example, steps S301 and S351 in the game control microcomputer 560) ) And special state control means (for example, steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560) which can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) which is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state. And a portion for executing the second identification information based on the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio controlled in the special state is higher than the ratio controlled in the special state based on the variable display of the first identification information (for example, see FIGS. 65 (c) and (d)). When the control is performed in the special state, the change time of the specific change pattern (for example, the second change shown in FIG. A variation pattern having a variation time shorter than the pattern # 01 (15 minutes) (for example, a second variation pattern # 03 having a variation time of 7 seconds shown in FIG. 13) may be easily selected. According to such a configuration, the degree of advantage can be changed between the special state and the non-special state by changing the selection ratio of the change pattern of the variable display of the second identification information, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

  (Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the state control means may include, as a special state, a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a more advantageous state than the first special state). , A second KT state), and a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) which is advantageous to the player and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) different from the advantageous state. , A predetermined variable device (for example, the special variable winning ball device 22) into which the game medium can enter when controlled to the special state, and a second special state. Special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, prize ball addition display 83) each time the game medium enters the predetermined variable device when the game machine is controlled to the special state. For example, the specific display means includes a part for executing steps S657B and S657C in the effect control microcomputer 200, and the specific display means changes the display content of the specific display in response to the execution of the special effect (for example, (Update of the display content of the specific payout display 82) may be executed. According to such a configuration, the entry of the game medium into the predetermined variable device in the special state can be emphasized, and the interest in the game in the second special state can be improved.

  (Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the state control means may include, as a special state, a first special state (eg, a first KT state) and a second special state (eg, a first KT state) which is more advantageous than the first special state. , A second KT state), and a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) which is advantageous to the player and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) different from the advantageous state. In the case where is controlled to the second special state, and when the special state is continuously controlled based on the variable display of the continuous identification information, a special effect (for example, , Special effect executing means capable of executing the small hit combo display 86). According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize that the special state has occurred continuously, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second special state.

  (Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the specific display means is a display different from the specific display (for example, the specific payout display 82) and corresponds to a predetermined period including an advantageous state and a special state. A special display (for example, special payout display 85) relating to the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) given as a special display can be displayed. When the special state is controlled, the specific display and the special display are distinguished. It can be displayed separately (for example, see FIGS. 70 (2) and 71 (3)). According to such a configuration, the player can grasp the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) given in correspondence with the predetermined period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, the state control means may include, as a special state, a first special state (eg, a first KT state) and a second special state (eg, a first KT state) which is more advantageous than the first special state. , The second KT state), and an advantageous notification executing means (for example, step S976D in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of executing an advantageous notification (for example, a jackpot notification effect) related to being controlled to the advantageous state. S976M), and the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, a 16R probable big hit) and a second advantageous state (for example, a sudden big hit) having a lower degree of advantage than the first advantageous state. When included and controlled to the first advantageous state, it is controlled to the second special state after the end of the first advantageous state, and when controlled to the second advantageous state, it is controlled to the second advantageous state. When the second special state is controlled, the advantage notification executing means executes an advantage notification related to the control to the first advantageous state when the second special state is controlled (for example, when the 16R certain change hit). A big hit notification effect based on the big hit), and restricting the execution of the benefit notification related to being controlled to the second advantageous state when the second special state is controlled (for example, executing a big hit notification effect based on the sudden jackpot) No). According to such a configuration, the execution / limitation of the advantage notification changes according to the type of the advantageous state, so that the interest in the game in the second special state can be improved.

  (Means 8) In the means 7, the state control means may include, as the special state, a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) which is more advantageous than the first special state. Signal output means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 560) capable of externally outputting an advantageous state signal (for example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) which can be specified to be controlled to the advantageous state. S2015X and the second special symbol stop process in which the same process as step S2015X is performed), and the signal output unit is controlled to the second special state and is controlled to the first advantageous state when controlled to the first advantageous state. Outputting a signal to the outside, and not outputting the advantageous state signal to the outside when the second advantageous state is controlled when the signal is controlled to the second special state. It may be. According to such a configuration, since the advantageous state signal matched to the content of the advantage notification can be externally output, the interest of the game is not reduced by the content of the external output.

  (Means 9) In any one of the means 1 to 8, the state control means may include, as a special state, a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a more advantageous state than the first special state). , Second KT state), and the specific display means can display the specific display when controlled to the second special state, and can limit the specific display when controlled to the first special state. (See, for example, FIG. 68). According to such a configuration, the interest of the game in the special state can be improved.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball device provided in the pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in a closed state of the special variable winning ball device provided in the pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball device provided in the pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the example of a circuit structure of a relay board, an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and a sound output board. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between a big hit determination random number and a big hit determination value. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable winning prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st starting port switch passage process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of a hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during 1st special symbol change in 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big winning opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol display control processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for describing an external output signal output by the gaming machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining a modification of an external output signal outputted by a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a normal symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory pre-opening process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric auditors product operation process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for effect control performs. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of a command reception buffer. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a confirmation command reception. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol process process. It is a flowchart shown about instruction | indication notification control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a demonstration display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a demonstration display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a background symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end production process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hitting process. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display example of instruction notification according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display example of instruction notification according to the present embodiment. It is a timing chart at the time of controlling a 1KT state after a big hit game state ends. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a hold storage display control process according to a first modification. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a background symbol change start process in a first modification. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a specific display control process according to a first modification. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a screen layout according to a first modification. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of display control such as a second hold display in Modification Example 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table in the modification 2. 15 is a flowchart showing award ball addition display processing in Modification Example 2. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a process table selection process according to a second modification. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a screen layout according to a second modification. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a time chart relating to payout display in Modification Example 2. It is an explanatory view showing a display example of a payout display in a modification 2. It is an explanatory view showing a display example of a payout display in a modification 2. It is an explanatory view showing a display example of a prize ball addition display in a modification 2. It is an explanatory view showing a display example of a small hit combo effect in Modification Example 2.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (ball game machine) 1 as viewed from the front. Here, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be, for example, an image-based gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, and a slot machine. Is also good.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape and provided in a game frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that is installed to be freely openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical components and the like are attached, and various components attached to them (game components to be described later). (Excluding the board 6).

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing hitting balls are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure that includes a plate-like body constituting the board and various components attached to the plate-like body. On the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which a hit game ball (hit ball) can flow down.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, a plurality of types of each of which can be identified based on establishment of a first start condition which is a first execution condition (for example, a hit ball has won a first start winning opening 13). A display area (hereinafter, referred to as a first variable display section 9a) for variably displaying an effect decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying a display result, and establishment of a second start condition that is a second execution condition. A display area for variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative symbols for production (second decorative symbols) each of which can be identified based on (for example, that a hit ball has won the second starting winning opening 14) and deriving and displaying a display result. (Hereinafter, referred to as a second variable display section 9b), and a display area (hereinafter referred to as a background pattern) in which a player can easily view the display contents more than the first variable display section 9a and the second variable display section 9b. Display section 9c). In addition, it is easy to visually recognize the display content, for example, when the size of the display area is large or the display content on the variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b is always a single color. The display color changes. In this embodiment, in the background symbol effect unit 9c, the display information of the identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as a background symbol) is controlled in three display areas of left, middle, and right. Note that the prize means that the game ball has entered an area, such as a winning opening, which is determined in advance as a prize area. Deriving and displaying a display result means stopping and displaying a symbol. In this embodiment, one background design effect unit 9c is provided for two variable display units (first variable display unit 9a and second variable display unit 9b). Since the effect corresponding to one of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) variably displayed on the two variable display portions is executed, the state of the decorative symbol (for example, whether the big hit symbol is derived and displayed). Or not). In this embodiment, the background symbol is for performing a symbol variation display for the effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. .

  Above the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided. In this embodiment, each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) that can variably display, for example, numbers from 0 to 9. Have been. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a may be referred to as a first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as a second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of activated prize balls entering the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first reserved memories (the reserved memory is also referred to as the starting memory or the starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 18a including four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lighted displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of illuminated displays is reduced by one. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is provided a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold storage. Is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lighted displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of illuminated displays is reduced by one.

  The first variable display section 9a variably displays a decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a. The second variable display section 9b performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. The first variable display section 9a and the second variable display section 9b for variably displaying decorative symbols are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display section 9a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display section 9b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. In addition, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol. Note that the type of the first decorative symbol and the type of the second decorative symbol may be the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9) or may be different types. When the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative pattern includes numbers 0 to 5 and characters other than the numbers, and the type of the second decorative pattern is characters other than the numbers 0 to 5 and the characters other than the numbers. May be included.

  On the display screen of the effect display device 9, the number of effective winning balls entering the first starting winning opening 13, ie, the first reserved storage number, and the number of effective winning balls entering the second starting winning opening 14, ie, the second retained storage number, are displayed. There is an area (hereinafter, referred to as a symbol hold storage display section 18c) for displaying the total number (total hold storage number) that is the sum of the above. As described above, in this embodiment, by displaying the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number on the symbol reservation storage display section 18c which is relatively easy to be recognized by the player, It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b are four displays such as lamps and LEDs smaller than the symbol hold storage display 18c. Although configured, a display device of another mode may be used in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. As an example, each of the first special symbol holding storage display 18a and the second special symbol holding storage display 18b is constituted by one display, and the display color is changed in accordance with the number of stored holdings, or the display density is different. To make it work.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of storages that can be displayed, that is, the total number of storages that are totalable, is eight. The symbol storage display unit 18c increases the number of lighted display areas by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted display areas is reduced by one. Alternatively, of the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display section 18c, the number of areas displayed in a color determined in advance as a valid start winning is increased by one. Then, every time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of areas displayed in a color determined in advance as an effective start winning is reduced by one.

  Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit of the second reserved storage number is set to 4. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening 13 when the first reserved storage number is 4, the winning is an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When a game ball wins in the first start winning opening 13 when the first reserved storage number is less than 4, the win is an effective start win (first effective start win) that satisfies the first start condition. Similarly, when a game ball wins in the second starting winning port 14 when the second number of stored memories is 4, the winning is an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the second starting condition. When a game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14 when the second reserved memory number is less than 4, the win is an effective start win (second effective start win) that satisfies the second start condition. In this example, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the total reserved storage number is set to 8, but these values are only examples. . In addition, the upper limit value may be changeable according to the game state.

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning port 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6, and is detected by the first start port switch 13a. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 13a, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  A gate 32 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a. The operation gate 17 is provided below the gate 32. The game ball that has passed through the operation gate 17 is detected by the operation gate switch 17a.

  Below the operation gate 17, there is provided a special variable winning prize ball device 20 which forms a special winning opening. The special variable winning ball device 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and a specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the opening / closing plate is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 21 in the advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed, the large winning opening, which is a winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Below the special variable winning ball device 20, a special variable winning ball device 22 forming a special winning port 24 for small hits, and a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 are provided. As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable prize ball device 22 is disposed on the left side, and a variable prize ball device 15 is disposed adjacent to the right side thereof. As will be described later in detail, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-like bottom surface formed as a bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows. By moving the member back and forth in the front-rear direction, the game ball wins an open state (also called an open state) in which the game ball can win in the special winning opening 24 or the second starting winning opening 14 located below the bottom member. The state is changed to an impossible closed state (also referred to as a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 22 moves the bottom member forward in the small hitting game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state toward the rear, and an opening control for opening the special winning opening 24 which is a winning area is executed. Also, the variable winning ball device 15, when a symbol hits the normal symbol display 10 and is displayed and displayed, moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, Opening control for opening the second start winning port 14 serving as a winning area is executed.

  In this embodiment, the special variable prize ball device 22 and the variable prize ball device 15 are formed to have the same structure. However, as shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 22 is slightly larger than the special variable winning ball device 22. Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable prize ball device 22 and the variable prize ball device 15 are arranged adjacent to each other, so that the special variable prize ball device 20 falls in the game area 7 without winning. The game ball first falls on the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is moved backward and the second starting winning port 14 is in the open state, The game ball wins the second start winning port 14, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 22. On the other hand, if the second start winning port 14 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 22. At this time, if the bottom surface member of the special variable winning ball device 22 is moved backward and the special winning port 24 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning port 24. Furthermore, if the special winning port 24 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 22 and falls toward the out port 26 as it is.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable prize ball device 22 is disposed on the left side and the variable prize ball device 15 is disposed on the right side. The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is formed so as to be gently inclined from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not receded and is in the closed state, the special variable winning from the variable winning ball device 15 is performed. Since the game balls are configured to flow toward the ball device 22, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided on the upstream side in this sense, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is provided on the downstream side in this sense. It can be said that it is provided.

  In the special winning opening 24, a switch (a second count switch 25a, see FIG. 5) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening 24 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 24 opened in the special variable winning ball device 22, although the number of prize balls is smaller than when the game ball wins in the special winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball passes (enters) another prize port such as the first start prize port 13a or the second start prize port 13b. Therefore, if the special variable winning prize ball device 22 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening 24 is opened, it becomes an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable prize ball device 22 is controlled to be closed and the special prize port 24 is closed, it is not possible to pass (enter) the game sphere to the special prize port 24 and obtain a prize ball. Disadvantaged to the elderly.

  In the second start winning port 14, an S switch 14a capable of detecting a game ball winning in the second start winning port 14 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 14a, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  In this embodiment, the gate 32, the operation gate 17, the special variable winning ball device 20 (large winning port), the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning port 14), and the special variable winning ball device 22 (special Since the winning opening 24) is provided on the right side of the game area 7, during a big hit game or a KT state to be described later, the player aims at the right side of the game area 7 to perform a firing operation (so-called right side). Hitting operation).

  In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball to pass through the gate 32 and reach the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation positions of the gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 32, and by a group of nails forming a flow path of the game ball. As will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to the open state based on the passing of the game ball through the gate 32. In the first KT state described later, the game ball is Is 0.5 seconds from when the variable prize ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state after passing through, and when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and reaches the variable prize ball device 15. Since the required time is shorter than 0.6 seconds, when the variable winning prize ball device 15 is controlled to open when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the first KT state, the one game ball becomes It is possible to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is.

  Below the effect display device 9, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying ordinary symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the symbol display 10 is generally implemented by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers from 0 to 9.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the ordinary symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is such that when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the player is in a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to the player (a state in which game balls can enter the second starting winning port 14). Changes to In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 10, there is provided an ordinary symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit of four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls passing through the gate 32. Each time a game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, each time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the symbol holding storage display 41 normally increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the ordinary symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be turned on is decreased by one.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative lamps 25 which are displayed blinking during the game, and at the bottom there is an out opening 26 for taking in a hit ball which has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that emit sound effects and voices as predetermined voice outputs are provided on the right and left upper sides outside the game area 7. A top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer periphery, the outer left portion, and the right outer portion of the game area 7. A prize ball lamp 51 is provided near the left frame lamp 28b, which lights when there is a remaining prize ball, and a ball out lamp 52, which lights up when the supply ball runs out, is provided near the right frame lamp 28c. Is provided.

  The gaming machine has a hit ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a hit ball operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch game balls into the game area 7. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hit ball operation handle 5, a game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. A game ball fired from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 7 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and thereafter descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the big hit game ends or the previous variable display ends). Then, the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display section 8a, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is changed in the variable display section 9a. Be started. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to a winning in the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol pending storage display section 18c on the condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the big hit game end or the previous variable display). Is completed and the second start condition is satisfied), the variable display (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display section 8b, and the second decorative symbol is displayed on the second variable symbol display section 9b. Is started. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning in the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol pending storage display section 18c on the condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1. However, even if the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, if the total reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit, the total number displayed on the symbol reserved storage display section 18c is increased by one.

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display section 9a stop when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the first special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a big hit symbol (specific display result), the state shifts to a big hit gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls wins the big winning opening. One round in the big hit game state is a period from when the special variable prize ball device 20 is opened until a predetermined period elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls wins the large winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls have won the special winning prize port, or when a certain period has elapsed since the special variable winning ball device 20 was opened, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). In addition, a V winning area may be provided in the special winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on condition that a hit ball wins in the V winning area while the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is open. Note that the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, there are two types of jackpots: 2R ordinary jackpot, 2R odd jackpot, 6R ordinary jackpot, 6R jackpot, and 16R jackpot. For example, if 2R jackpot or 2R jackpot occurs, two rounds of jackpot game If a state is given and a 6R regular big hit or a 6R likelihood big hit occurs, a two round big hit game state is given. If a 16R like big hit occurs, a 16 round big hit game state is given.

  When it is determined that the stop symbol at the time of stopping the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is a big hit symbol with a probability change (special display result: a probable change symbol, for example, “7”). Is a high probability state in which the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there is a low probability / non-KT state and a low probability / first KT state, which will be described later). State), which is an advantageous state for the player. In addition, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined as the probability variable symbol and shifts to the probability variation state, not only the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 8a becomes a big hit symbol increases, The probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a big hit symbol is also increased. In other words, not only in the jackpot determination based on the first start winning but also in the jackpot determination based on the second starting winning, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

  The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display section 9b are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the second special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a big hit symbol (specific display result), the state shifts to a big hit gaming state.

  When it is determined that the stop symbol at the time of stopping the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is a big hit symbol with a probability change (special display result: a probable change symbol, for example, “7”). Is a high probability state in which the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there is a low probability / non-KT state and a low probability / first KT state, which will be described later). State), which is an advantageous state for the player. In addition, when the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined as the probability variable symbol and shifts to the probability variation state, not only the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol indicator 8b becomes a big hit symbol increases, The probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a big hit symbol is also increased. In other words, not only in the jackpot determination based on the second start winning but also in the jackpot determination based on the first starting winning, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

  When the second special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a small hit symbol, the game shifts to a small hit gaming state. That is, the special variable prize ball device 22 is opened until a certain period of time that allows a game ball to enter the special prize port 24 elapses. In this manner, even in the small hitting game state, the opening state is set so that the player can obtain a payout although the number is smaller than that in the big hitting game state.

  In the probable change state, as described above, the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is a big hit symbol (specific display result: for example, , 0-9) is higher than the low probability state.

  Here, a gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state according to the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). The case where it is controlled, the case where it is controlled to the low probability and the first KT state (low probability / first KT state), and the case where it is controlled to the high probability and the first KT state (the high probability / the first KT state). , High probability and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

  In the first KT state of the KT states, as described later, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 22 is easily opened, but the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 15 is extremely long, and Is very rare (for example, about one ball every 100 fluctuations). In the second KT state of the KT states, as described later, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 15 is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side. Easy to win.

  The probable change state is a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than the low probability state. More specifically, since the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the probability change state is ten times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability change state is more likely to cause a bigger hit than the low probability state. The game state is easy to play.

  The KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). More specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state as a normal drawing is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. When the second special symbol fluctuates, it is configured to be a small hit except for a large hit (except in the case of a forced loss described later). It is a game state that is easy to become. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated mainly by causing the second special symbol to fluctuate, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

  Note that the configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which the KT state is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning prize ball device 15 will be in the open state as a normal figure is the same as the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol fluctuates. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the KT state has a higher ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time than the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

  Next, transition of the game state in the present embodiment will be described. First, in the present embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a shooting operation (left hit) of a game ball aiming at the left of the game area 7. For this reason, in the normal state, a start winning prize mainly occurs in the first starting winning opening 13, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, the state shifts to the low probability / first KT state, the high probability / first KT state, or the high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / first KT state. After that, when 100 times of variable display are ended without occurrence of the big hit, the first KT state is ended and the state shifts to the normal state. In addition, for example, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. Also, for example, when a 16R certain-variable big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the first KT state ends when the variable display is uniformly completed 100 times in the case of controlling to the low probability / first KT state. However, such a mode is limited. Absent. For example, it is configured to provide a plurality of types of jackpots that trigger the low probability / first KT state, and the number of times of the variable display in which the first KT state continues after the end of the jackpot game differs according to the type of the jackpot (for example, 20 times). Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

  In this embodiment, when the player has shifted to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves the right side of the game area 7 in this embodiment. Aiming to launch the game ball (right-handed). For this reason, in the KT state, a start winning prize mainly occurs in the second start winning opening 14, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, the state shifts to the low probability / first KT state, the high probability / first KT state, or the high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / first KT state. After that, when 100 times of fluctuation display are ended without occurrence of the big hit, the first KT state is ended and the state shifts to the normal state. In addition, for example, when a 2R probability changing big hit or a 6R probability changing big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. Also, for example, when a 16R certain-variable big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  However, as will be described later, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R certain-variable big hit occurs even though the non-KT state was set before the start of the big hit, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, control is performed so as to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later). In other words, this is a case where a 16R certain-variable big hit occurs due to the right display and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol even in the normal state. In such a case, the state shifts to the second KT state and a considerable number of small hit games is performed. If the player can obtain the prize ball, some players may actively play the game by right-handing in the normal state, and the original playability is impaired. From this, even if a right hit in the normal state and a 16R probability big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, a penalty is imposed by shifting only to the first KT state, thereby imposing a penalty in the normal state. Aggressive right-handed games can be suppressed.

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display section 9a are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display section 9b are synchronized. Here, “synchronous” means that the variable display starts and ends at the same time and the variable display period is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display section 9a. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display section 9b.

  Further, when the probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, a decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display section 9a. When the probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, a special decorative symbol (for example, “7”) reminiscent of the probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display section 9b.

  In the background symbol display section 9c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in three display areas in the background symbol display section 9c. When performing a reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during variable display. Although there are exceptions as described later, basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived in the background symbol display section 9c. It is displayed (the background symbol is finally stopped in the three display areas). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the background symbol is a background symbol (for example, the left symbol) that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a big hit symbol. (Three background symbols with the middle right aligned). Hereinafter, such a background design is also called a big hit design.

  When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in three display areas in the background symbol display section 9c.

  When the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 8b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. An effect corresponding to any of the variable displays is executed.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is independently variably displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. Is displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed simultaneously, When the special symbol whose variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) for a background symbol that has not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol forms a part of the big hit symbol among the three background symbols. ) Is performed, and all or a part of the background symbols are variably displayed synchronously while forming all or a part of the big hit symbol.

  For example, in a state in which a decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that is a part of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display regions of the left, middle, and right display regions in the background symbol display portion 9c. The middle display area is in a state where the variable display is still being performed, and a state where all or a part of the display area is synchronously displayed while forming all or a part of the big hit symbol (for example, background The variable display is performed in all of the left, middle, and right display areas in the symbol display section 9c, and the variable display is performed in a state where the same symbols are always arranged).

  In addition, at the time of the reach, an unusual effect is performed by lamps and sounds. The effect and the reach display mode in the background symbol display section 9c are called a reach effect. Also, at the time of the reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background design) is displayed, or the background of the background design display portion 9c (the background color or pattern different from the design and the character) is displayed. , Etc.) may be changed.

  Next, FIGS. 2 to 4 are views showing the special variable winning ball device 22. FIG. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball device 22 will be described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the structure of the special variable prize ball device 22 is described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. However, the variable prize ball device 22 is only slightly smaller in size than the special variable prize ball device 22. The structure of the ball device 15 is the same as the structure of the special variable winning ball device 22.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the special variable winning prize ball device 22 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base plate portion 101 that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 22 is fixedly supported in the game area 7 by fixing the base plate portion 101 to the game area 7 with, for example, screws. A special winning opening 24 (the second starting winning opening 14 in the case of the variable winning ball device 15) that opens forward is formed in a substantially central region of the base plate portion 101, and a special winning opening in the base plate portion 101 is formed. At a position above the mouth 24, a slit-shaped accommodation hole 102 long in the left-right direction for accommodating the bottom member 23 on the back side (rear) of the game area 7 when the bottom member 23 retreats is formed. Have been. In addition, in this embodiment, the special winning opening 24 is formed slightly leftward from the center in the left-right direction of the base plate portion 101, but may be leftward or rightward.

  The bottom member 23 is inclined left downward so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down toward the left, and the accommodation hole 102 is inclined left downward so as to follow the inclination of the bottom member 23. It is formed so that. The bottom member 23 is capable of moving forward and backward between a state in which it is moved forward as shown in FIG. 3 and a state in which it is moved backward as shown in FIG. A drive device (not shown) for moving the actuator forward and backward is disposed.

  Returning to FIGS. 2 to 4, a flow path forming base 112 protruding forward is formed on the front side of the base plate part 101, and a forward moving movement is formed above the flow path forming base 112. An upstream region 23U, which is an upper end (right end) of the bottom member 23 in a state where the bottom member 23 is in a longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23, and an upstream passage portion 113 that forms a flow path of a game ball with the bottom member 23; A downstream region 23L, which is a lower end portion (left end portion) of the bottom member 23, is continuous with the bottom member 23 in the longitudinal direction, and a downstream channel portion 114 that forms a flow path of a game ball with the bottom member 23 is formed. I have.

  In addition, the upper part of the flow path forming base 112 is recessed downward from the end of the upstream flow path part 113 and the downstream flow path part 114 on the bottom member 23 side. A guide channel portion 115 is formed so as to surround the game ball dropped below the bottom member 23 to the special winning opening 24 so as to be surrounded from below.

  The upstream-side channel portion 113 and the downstream-side channel portion 114 are formed so as to incline to the lower left so that the game ball can flow to the left. The bottom of the guide channel 115 extends downward and leftward toward the special winning opening 24 and is concave at a position in front of the special winning opening 24. In the recessed space at the bottom of the guide channel portion 115, a triangular guide portion 116 for guiding the game ball backward toward the special winning opening 24 side (the back side of the game area 7) is provided. ing.

  Furthermore, a covering portion 117 that covers the upstream channel portion 113, the downstream channel portion 114, and the guide channel portion 115 from the front is integrally formed at the front part (the player side) of the channel forming base portion 112. Have been. The covering portion 117 covers the upstream side channel portion 113, the downstream side channel portion 114, and the guide channel portion 115 from the front, so that game balls flowing down the respective channel portions bounce toward the glass door frame 4. It has a function to prevent that. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 117 is formed integrally with the channel forming base portion 112, but may be fixed separately.

  In the special variable winning prize ball device 22, the flow of the game sphere extending in the left-right direction between the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117, the upstream-side channel portion 113, the bottom member 23, and the downstream-side channel portion 114. A path F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of regulating pieces 118 are formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 so as to reduce the flow speed of the game balls flowing down the flow path F.

  In the present embodiment, the regulating piece 118 is formed integrally with the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 101 or protruding backward from the covering portion 117. By interfering with the game ball, the flowing direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball flowing to the left is meandering with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flowing is changed without the restriction piece 118. Delay more than. These restriction pieces 118 are formed so as to be arranged at predetermined intervals in the flow direction of the game balls in the flow path F, and are formed alternately on the base plate portion 101 and the cover portion 117. In addition, the regulating piece 118 is set to have a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 23, and is set to a width dimension that allows a game ball to pass between adjacent ones. I have. More specifically, in this embodiment, one regulating piece 118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 117 that covers the upstream-side channel portion 113 from the front, and the downstream-side channel portion of the covering portion 117 is formed. One regulating piece 118 is formed in a portion that covers 114 from the front. Further, in a portion of the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 that covers the bottom member 23, a total of five regulating pieces 118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed. In addition, the number of such restriction pieces 118 is not particularly limited. In the present embodiment, most of the regulating piece 118 is covered by the covering portion 117 from the front (from the player side).

  With the arrangement of the restricting pieces 118 as described above, the special variable winning ball device 22 (and the variable winning ball device 15 configured similarly) of the present embodiment tends to flow down the flow path F with reference to FIG. The game ball P flows down so as to meander on the flow path F. When the special variable prize ball device 22 (or variable prize ball device 15) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P is placed in the special prize port 24 (or the second start prize port 14). , And basically passes through the special variable prize ball device 22 (or the variable prize ball device 15). On the other hand, referring to FIG. 4, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which the bottom member 23 moves backward is opened, the game ball P is guided by the flow path forming base 112. It is possible to drop into the flow channel portion 115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow channel portion 115 to win the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14).

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 5 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing a control operation according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the RAM 56 in addition to the CPU 56, and the ROM 54 may be externally or internally incorporated. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) hereinafter executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to the microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 31.

  Further, detection signals from the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operation gate switch 17a are given to the game control microcomputer 560. The input driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31, and controls the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20, the solenoid 106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 22, and the solenoid 206 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15. Output circuit 59, which is driven in accordance with a command from the microcomputer 560, is also mounted on the main board 31, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control microcomputer 560 when the power is turned on; Information such as big hit information Information output circuit that outputs a force signal to an external device such as a hall computer (not shown) is also mounted on the main substrate 31. Note that the main board 31 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting a test signal to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (comprising an effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 transmits an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Display control is performed on the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that receive and variably display decorative symbols, the background symbol display unit 9c that variably displays background symbols, and the symbol hold storage display unit 18c.

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. Although the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 in the example shown in FIG. 6, a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70.

  The effect control board 80 carries an effect control microcomputer 200 including an effect control CPU 201 and a RAM. Note that the RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 201 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives an input signal (from the main board 31 via the relay board 77). An effect control command is received via the input driver 202 and the input port 203 according to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 209 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 202 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 202 allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  The relay board 77 serves as a signal direction restricting means for passing a signal input from the main board 31 only in a direction toward the effect control board 80 (not passing a signal in a direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). Is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 6 illustrates a diode. In addition, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, so that the signal from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 31 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be provided outside the output port 571 (on the side of the relay board 77).

  Further, effect control CPU 201 outputs a signal for driving a lamp to lamp driver board 35 via input / output port 205. The effect control CPU 201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the input / output port 204.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. In addition, the lamp is supplied to the decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, a special winning port lamp 24a is provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 22, and the lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to the special winning port lamp 24a.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates a voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the audio synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706. The sound data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined time period (for example, a change period of the decorative design) in a time-series manner.

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are transmitted between the effect control CPU 201 and the lamp driver board 35 and the sound output board 70 in two-way communication (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

  The effect control CPU 201 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM stores character image data that is frequently used among images displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure or a symbol (including a decorative pattern and a background pattern) in advance. It is for keeping. Effect control CPU 201 outputs data read from the character ROM to VDP 209. The VDP 209 executes display control based on data input from the effect control CPU 201.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 209 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 200, and maps a VRAM there. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

  In this embodiment, the effect control board 80, the sound output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which circuits for controlling the effect device are mounted. It may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and a second effect control board on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) are mounted. And two effect control boards may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command directly to the effect control microcomputer 200. However, another board (for example, the sound output board 70 or the lamp shown in FIG. 6) may be used. It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 in the effect control board 80 via the driver board 35). In this case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control unit such as a microcomputer may be mounted on the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35, and the control unit may receive the command in response to the command. The control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is transmitted as it is or to a simplified command, for example, to the effect control microcomputer 200 that controls the effect display device 9. You may. In addition, when two boards of the first effect control board and the second effect control board are provided, the command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board, A command is transmitted as it is from the second effect control board to the first effect control board, or transmitted after processing (for example, changing or simplifying the form or content of the command or selecting only necessary commands). May be configured.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether or not the contents of the program are valid. After executing a security check process as a process for confirming whether the main process is started, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) as built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device indicates the interrupt address. Mode.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input through the input port only once (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether or not data protection processing (for example, processing for stopping power supply such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine has been stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (ON state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (OFF state).

  After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is restored after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, and the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, the initialization processing executed at the time of turning on the power other than the recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in a work area (an area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data is set for an area of the work area that may be initialized. As a result of the processing of steps S91 and S92, the saved contents of the work area that must not be initialized remain. The part which should not be initialized includes, for example, data indicating a game state before the power supply is stopped (a special symbol process flag or the like), an area where the output state of the output port is stored (output port buffer), an unpaid prize ball. This is a portion where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and in accordance with the contents, sends a control command (power command) indicating that power supply has been restored to the effect control board 80. Control is performed such that a restoration command (initialization command at the time of supply restoration) is transmitted (step S94). Then, control goes to a step S15.

  In this embodiment, whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored is confirmed using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, one of the backup flag and the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that, without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of a counter for generating a big hit random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, processing is selectively performed according to a control state such as a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a winning ball flag, a ball out flag, and a payout stop flag. The initial value is set to the flag for this.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the command transmission table at the time of initialization stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board to the sub-board according to the contents. The process is executed (Step S14). Examples of the initialization command include a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9 and the like.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (Steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (Step S17) and the initial value random number update process (Step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited (step S16), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt is enabled. It is set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of a counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a big hit determination random number generation counter). A game control process for controlling the progress of a game described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls a game display device, a variable prize ball device, a ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In a process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of a random number generation counter for a big hit determination or the like is made one round (a random number generation counter for a big hit determination or the like). (Steps by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values) can be performed, and the initial value is set in the counter.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interruption process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not the power-on signal has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, upon detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operation gate switch 17a are input via the input driver circuit 58. Then, the state of those is determined (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a display control process for performing display control of the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol holding storage display 18a, and the second special symbol holding storage display 18b. Execute (Step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, control is performed to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S32.

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for big hit determination used in game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Determine whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit determination)
(2) Random 2: The type of big hit, that is, 2R normal big hit, 2R certain big hit, 6R normal big hit, 6R certain big hit or 16R certain big hit is determined (for big hit type determination)
(3) Random 5: Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for fluctuation pattern determination)
(4) Random 6: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 7: Determine initial value of random 1 (for determining random 1 initial value)
(6) Random 8: Determine initial value of random 6 (for determining random 6 initial value)

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control microcomputer 560 determines (1) the big hit random number, (2) the big hit type determination random number, and (4) the normal symbol hit determination The counter for generating a random number is counted up (added by one). That is, they are the random numbers for determination, and the other random numbers are the random numbers for display or the random numbers for initial values. Note that random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (6) are also used in order to enhance the game effect. In the present embodiment, a common random number (random 2) is provided as a random number for determining the type of big hit and a random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided. You may.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a first special symbol process process (step S26A). In the first special symbol process process, a corresponding process is executed according to a first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 in a predetermined order according to a game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Next, the CPU 56 performs a second special symbol process (step S26B). In the second special symbol process process, the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 are controlled according to a second special symbol process flag in a predetermined order according to the game state. Execute the corresponding process. The CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Then, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol process process (step S26C). In the normal symbol process process, a corresponding process is executed in accordance with a normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 10 and the variable winning ball device 15 in a predetermined order according to a game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a hold storage process (step S27a). In the pending storage process, the CPU 56 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command relating to the display control of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and an effect control command relating to the number of retained storages (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a. (Step S30). More specifically, the payout control board 37 is controlled in response to a winning detection based on the turning-on of one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a. A payout control command indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 according to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. Output (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data according to the value of the first special symbol process flag. A special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for effect display of the second special symbol in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data in accordance with the value of the second special symbol process flag Control processing is performed (step S32). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 second, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by one every 0.2 seconds. In addition, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby variably displaying the special symbols on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. Execute

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting the ordinary symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the ordinary symbol in the output buffer for setting the ordinary symbol display control data according to the value of the ordinary symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 second, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by one every 0.2 seconds. In addition, the CPU 56 executes variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. Thereafter, an interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. Note that the game control processing corresponds to the processing of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set. May be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the two displays. Control is performed so that a big hit does not occur at the same time in the two displays.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the big hit determination table. The big hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a non-probability-change large-hit determination table used in a low-probability state (low-probability / non-KT state, low-probability / first-KT state) and a probable-change state (high-probability state (high-probability / first-KT state, high-probability state). Probability / second KT state)). Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 10 is set in the non-probable variable big hit determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 10 is set in the positive variable big hit determination table. . The numerical values described in FIG. 10 are the jackpot determination values.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the random number for random determination (random 1). If it matches the jackpot determination value, it is determined that a special symbol is to be made a jackpot. The “probability” shown in FIG. 10 indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol.

  In the present embodiment, if it is determined that a large hit is not to be made when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, all the symbols are unconditionally removed. If it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, all the small hits are unconditionally made (however, as will be described later, the forced loss is made later) In some cases).

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination table 131a stored in the ROM 54. The big hit type determination table 131a sets the big hit type to “2R normal big hit”, “2R This is a table that is referred to to determine any one of “probably variable jackpot”, “6R ordinary jackpot”, “6R probability variable jackpot”, or “16R probability variable jackpot”.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (A), in this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, “16R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 20%, and “16R probability variation hit” is determined with a probability of 45%. 6R probable big hit "is determined, and" 6R normal big hit "is determined with a probability of 35%. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11B, in this embodiment, when performing the variation display of the second special symbol, “16R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 30%, and a probability of 30% is determined. Is determined to be "6R probability variable hit", 5% probability is determined to be "2R probability variable hit", and 35% probability is determined to be "2R normal variable hit".

  The "16R probable big hit" is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the 16-bit big hit game state and is shifted to the high probability / second KT state after the end of the big hit game state. At the same time, the state is shifted to the second KT state (see steps S2207A, S2208A, S2207B, and S2210B described later). Then, the probable change state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

  However, in this embodiment, when performing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, if the non-KT state is present before the start of the big hit, even if the “16R certain variable big hit” is set, the state is not the second KT state. In some cases, the state transitions to the first KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later).

  The “6R probable big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of 6 rounds and is shifted to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the big hit game state (in this embodiment, it is shifted to the certain change state). At the same time, the state is shifted to the first KT state (see steps S2210A, S2211A, S2212B, and S2213B described later). Then, the probable change state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

  The “6R normal big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of six rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the big hit game state ends (see step S2212A described later). After the transition to the first KT state, when the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S2213A, S2010 to S2013). Note that, even before the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

  The “2R probable big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of two rounds and is shifted to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the big hit game state. At the same time, the state is shifted to the first KT state (see steps S2212B and S2213B described later). Then, the probable change state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

  The “2R normal big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of two rounds and the state is shifted to only the first KT state after the big hit game state ends (see step S2214B described later). After the transition to the first KT state, when the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S2215B, S2010 to S2013). Note that, even before the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

  The types of the jackpot types are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it may be configured to be able to determine 3R probability variable hit to 7R probability variable hit in addition to 16R probability variable hit, 2R probability variable hit, and 2R normal variable hit. Can be

  FIG. 12 to FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and the second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol Eighteen types # 01 to # 18 are used. Hereinafter, for example, a variation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 18) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

  When the first special symbol variation display is executed, if the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state) is set, the non-KT first special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. The variation pattern is selected to determine. As shown in FIG. 12A, in the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the variation is determined to any one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

  When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if it is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), KT shown in FIG. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 12 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in the KT state, the variation is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

  When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, when the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state) is set, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. The selection is made to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 13 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the pattern is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 02. Specifically, when it is determined that the small hit is made, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

  In this embodiment, even when the non-KT state is in effect, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, a situation in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of game balls into the special winning opening 24 may occur. Will happen. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the variation display is reduced. By doing so, the frequency of occurrence of small hits is rather reduced, thereby preventing a situation in which a small hit is aimed at acquiring a prize ball even in the non-KT state. In this embodiment, the “frequency of occurrence of small hits” is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, one minute). Is higher than the normal state.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even if a big hit occurs. By making the length relatively long, it is possible to prevent an act of aiming for a prize ball by unreasonably winning the special winning opening 24 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, since the digestion of the first hold memory does not need to be longer than in the case of a small hit, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the case of a small hit. I have.

  In the case of executing the second special symbol change display, in the case of the low probability / first KT state, in the case of the low probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which triggered the low probability / first KT state is ended. The variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times of the variation after that. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 03 to # 04. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (D), when it is determined that a small hit is the first change of the low probability / first KT state, the second change is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds for the small hit. The pattern is determined to be pattern # 03 (a fluctuation pattern for preparing the second start winning opening). In this embodiment, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, although the frequency of small hits increases, the opening time of the variable prize ball device 15 is increased to actually increase the special variable prize prize. The special winning opening 24 in the ball device 22 is set so that it rarely wins. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special variable winning ball is immediately formed. If the device 22 is controlled to the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 24. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first variation of the first KT state, the variation time of at least 7 seconds is secured, so that the variable prize ball device 15 and the special variable prize ball device 22 can be changed before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable prize ball device 22 to an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member have fallen, and enabling the prize to the special prize port 24, This prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state.

  In addition, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations is performed after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which triggered the low probability / first KT state is executed, FIG. Then, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and for the 2nd to 99th variation is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (E), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second to 99th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation patterns # 05 to # 07, # 30. Is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 13E, when it is determined to be a small hit as the 2nd to 99th change of the low probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 05 of the shortened change having a short change time of 5 seconds. In some cases, the second variation pattern # 030 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as one second is determined. The second variation pattern # 05 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 30 can be selected only when one or more second hold storages are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. Thus, the configuration is such that the use of the reserved storage is expedited and the operation rate is increased. In this embodiment, the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th variation of the low probability / first KT state, and when the variation display is executed based on the second variation pattern # 06, the effect display device 9 is set. In the variation display of the background symbol in, an effect of pattern fanning such as reaching or a sliding effect is executed.

  Also, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which triggered the low probability / first KT state is completed, the 100th fluctuation display (ie, the final fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state) is executed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 100th variation shown in FIG. 13 (F) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, any of the second variation patterns # 08 to # 09 is determined. Is done.

  In this embodiment, when the state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, for example, a character display such as “during a chance time” is displayed on the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the small probability is determined as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the end display for displaying characters such as “CHANCE TIME END !!” on the effect display device 9. Is determined as the second variation pattern # 08. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (F), when it is determined that the big hit is the 100th change of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 9 finishes displaying characters such as “CHANCE TIME END !!”. After the display, it is determined to be the second variation pattern # 09 accompanied by a predetermined resurrection display.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, if a big hit occurs in the variation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern # 07 having a variation time of 10 seconds is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case in which a big hit has occurred immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a long change time, Since the fluctuation of the second special symbol executed during the fluctuation of the big hit of the first special symbol is configured to be forcibly released, the forcible release frequently occurs even in the second KT state, and the player loses the small hit. You will not receive any profits. Therefore, in this embodiment, by changing the fluctuation time of the big hit change of the first special symbol to a short change time, it is possible to shift to the big hit game state based on the change of the first special symbol before forcible loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

  Note that, unlike the present embodiment, even when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, the change of the second special symbol is not forcibly removed (for example, the first special symbol). When the second special symbol is fluctuating when the special symbol big hit symbol is stopped, the second special symbol is forcibly removed. May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case in which a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state. You will not be able to receive any profits from small hits. Therefore, if the change time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is set to a long change time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, there is a sufficient time that the small hit can be generated at least a plurality of times. (For example, one minute).

  In the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / first KT state, in the case of the high probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R probable big hit or the 2R probable big hit is ended. The change pattern table is selected in accordance with the number of times of change after the change. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be performed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 10 to # 12. Is done.

  Similar to the first change of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), when the small hit is determined as the first change of the high probability / first KT state, the second start winning is achieved. In some cases, the variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern for opening the mouth (second variation pattern # 10). Also, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), when it is determined to be a big hit as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probable change state (high probability state) is ended. The second variation pattern # 12 including the effect is determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), the second variation pattern # 11 including the battle effect may be determined when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state.

  FIG. 14H shows a case in which the change display after the second change is performed after the big hit game based on the 6R certain hit jackpot or the 2R certain hit jackpot which has triggered the high probability / first KT state. The second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / first KT shown and for the second variation and thereafter is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed after the second variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation patterns # 13 to # 15 and # 31 are displayed. Determined to be one.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 14H, when the small probability is determined as the second or later variation of the high probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. In some cases, the second variation pattern # 13 having a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds or the second variation pattern # 031 having a shortened variation as short as 1 second may be determined. The second variation pattern # 13 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 31 can be selected only when one or more second hold storages are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. Thus, the configuration is such that the use of the reserved storage is expedited and the operation rate is increased.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), when it is determined to be a big hit as the second or higher change of the high probability / first KT state, it is necessary to indicate whether or not the probable change state (high probability state) ends. A second variation pattern # 15 including a battle effect is determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), the second variation pattern # 14 including the battle effect may be determined even when the small hit is determined as the second variation of the high probability / first KT state or later. .

  When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 14 (I) is selected. Thus, the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 16 to # 18.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when it is determined that the small hit is made in the high probability / second KT state, the shortened fluctuation of the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). In some cases, the second variation pattern # 16 of the shortened variation is determined to be 1.5 seconds shorter than the case where the variation display is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when it is determined to be a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation including a continuous effect indicating whether or not the high probability / second KT state is continued. The pattern # 17 may be determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when it is determined that the big hit is in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for indicating whether or not the probable change state (high probability state) ends after the continuous effect. The second variation pattern # 18 including the effect is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the variation pattern including the continuous effect and the battle effect is determined, the continuous effect and the battle effect are executed on the effect display device 9 in the change display of the background symbol. When a big hit (16R probable big hit, 6R probable big hit, 2R probable big hit) is performed, the effect of the victory mode is executed in the battle effect, and when it becomes a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), the battle effect is performed. An effect in a mode of defeat is executed, and when a small hit occurs, an effect in a draw mode is executed in a battle effect. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, and for example, it may be configured such that even in the case of a 2R probability variable big hit with a small number of rounds during the big hit game, the effect of the defeat mode is executed in the battle effect. .

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the first KT state is configured to execute the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second, and the second KT state is configured to execute the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds. Although a case is shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a short variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the low probability state, and a short variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the high probability state.

  Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state. 15 (1) shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state, and FIG. 15 (2) shows a variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable ball device 15 in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 22 is shown.

  First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15A, when a game ball passes through the gate 32 and a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 displays a variable display of the normal symbol, and Is determined, the symbol is hit and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 10, and if it is determined that the symbol is lost, the shifted symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination time for deriving and displaying a hit symbol or a lost symbol is 0.2 seconds. . Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15A, after the symbol fixing time 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second starting winning opening opening process time 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 14.

  When a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined that a small hit is made, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning port 24. Becomes However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15A, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short. The opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball wins in the special winning opening 24 (for example, about one ball every 100 fluctuation display).

  In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the opening of the variable winning prize ball device 15 is completed, the next variable winning prize ball device 15 can be opened only after the fluctuation time of the next ordinary symbol. This is after a lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is a total of 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination time 0.2 seconds, and the second starting winning opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closed period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened.

  In the present embodiment, in the first KT state, the variable winning prize ball device 15 is normally controlled to be in the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second starting winning opening pre-opening time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball is gated. The time required to reach the variable prize ball device 15 after passing through 32 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is usually longer. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to the time when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 in a state where the symbol is not changed is not changed, the variable winning ball device 15 is already in the open state. When being controlled, the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls that have passed through the gate 32 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed are more likely to win the variable winning ball device 15.

  Next, an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a detects the game ball, the normal symbol display device 10 performs a variable display of the ordinary symbol, and Is determined, the symbol is hit and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 10, and if it is determined that the symbol is lost, the shifted symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 1.0 second, and the symbol determination time for deriving and displaying a hit symbol or a lost symbol is set to 0.2 second. . Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), after the symbol fixing time 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 0.2 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 14.

  When a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined that a small hit is made, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and a game ball can win in the special winning port 24. Becomes

  In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely short, 0.2 seconds. In the present embodiment, in the second KT state, at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol fluctuation time 1.0 second + symbol confirmation time 0) is set as an interval period (closed period) after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. .2 seconds + the time before the second start winning opening opening process is 2.6 seconds). Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the opening time of the variable winning prize ball device 15 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. The game ball is easy to enter the special variable winning ball device 22 of the above, and the game ball is easy to win in the special winning opening 24.

  Also, in the present embodiment, in the second KT state, it is normal that the variable winning prize ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed. After a total of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 second, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 second, and the second starting winning opening pre-opening time of 2.6 seconds, the game ball is gated. The time required to reach the variable prize ball device 15 after passing through 32 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is normally longer. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to the time when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 in a state where the symbol is not changed is changed, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state. Before the game, the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for game balls that have passed through the gate 32 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed to be won in the variable winning ball device 15.

  In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is performed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56). (See step S26C). In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control also executes a process of determining whether or not to win the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol process process of step S26C, but depending on whether it is in the KT state or the normal state. For example, it is determined whether or not to make a per-drawing based on different probabilities (for example, 10/11 in the KT state and 1/11 in the normal state). It should be noted that the same probability is obtained regardless of whether the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), whether the game state is the non-KT state, the first KT state or the second KT state, or the big hit game state. (For example, 10% or 100%) may be used to determine whether or not to make a per-drawing.

  In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the second start winning opening opening process is the second time. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 is made different by shortening it to 0.1 second in the 1KT state and increasing it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been described. I can't. For example, the closing time (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be made different by changing the fluctuating time and the symbol confirmation time between the first KT state and the second KT state. Also, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to be controllable, and if the time after the second starting winning opening opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Thus, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be made different. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable prize ball device 15 in the first KT state is shortened by any one of the methods described above, it is possible to suppress winning in the special prize port 24 in the first KT state. it can.

  Further, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable prize ball device 15 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable prize as shown in FIG. The first release pattern (long release) for releasing the ball device 15 for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, the second release pattern (see FIG. 15 (2)) for releasing the variable winning ball device 15 for a short time ( (Short release). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the control may be performed such that the special flag is not set in other states including the big hit game state.

  Further, even in the first KT state, when performing the low probability / last change display in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be shortened. For example, the special flag may be erased in response to the 99th special symbol fluctuation stop of the 100 special symbol reduction fluctuation periods in the low probability / first KT state. With such a configuration, when performing the left-hitting notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state, it is possible to prevent the variable winning prize ball device 15 from giving a sense of incongruity to the fact that the variable winning ball device 15 is long opened. be able to.

  As described above, when the variable prize ball device 15 is configured using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable prize ball device 15, a flag for shortening and changing the variable display of the special symbol is further used. In this case, the special symbol may be controlled to be changed, and in this case, the special flag and the flag for the shortened change may be separately managed and controlled.

  Further, the variable winning ball device 15 may be configured to be short-opened during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, in a case where the opening probability of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased in the low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. In this case, it is possible to prevent the variable winning prize ball device 15 from winning, and to prevent the right-handing operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the variation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable symbol is a variable winning prize ball in a state where the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped and the status of the ordinary symbol is not stored. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. The variable prize ball device 15 does not open until the game ball that has passed through reaches the variable prize ball device 15 or the special variable prize ball device 22, so that the special prize port 24 can be won. On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning prize ball device 15 is opened before the game ball reaches the variable prize ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32. Since it is set to be started, it is possible to eliminate a capture element by a shooting operation aiming at a small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

  FIGS. 16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 16, the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H) correspond to the first variable display section 9a or the second variable display section corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. 9b is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol variably displayed in 9b. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of the variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H), the first variable display section 9 a or the second variable display section 9 b Is controlled to start the variable display of decorative symbols.

  The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (outstroke designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is a 16R probability variation big hit. . The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is a 6R probability variation big hit. . The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 specifying command (6R normal big hit specifying command)) for specifying that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design specified by the variation pattern command is a 6R normal big hit. . The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 2R probability variation big hit. . The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 specifying command (2R normal big hit specifying command)) for specifying that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design specified by the variation pattern command is a 2R normal big hit. . The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

  Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 200 receives the display result designation command immediately before the first variation pattern command. Since the command can be determined to be a display result specifying command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result specifying command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result specifying command for the second decorative symbol, The display result designating command can be used for the first decorative design and the second decorative design, but the display result designating command for the first decorative design and the display result designating command for the second decorative design may be different.

  Further, instead of the game control microcomputer 560 transmitting the display result designation command, the microcomputer 560 does not transmit the display result designation command, but responds to each of the 15R probability big hit / 6R probability big hit / 6R normal big hit / 2R certain big hit / 2R normal big hit / small hit / out. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

  The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first design confirmation designation command (first decoration design stop designation command)) for instructing stop of the variable display of the first decoration design. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second design confirmation designation command (second decoration design stop designation command)) for instructing stop of the variable display of the second decoration design.

  The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. B000 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of the first big hit game (first big hit start specifying command: first fanfare specifying command). B001 (H) is an effect control command for designating the end of the first big hit game (first big hit end specifying command: first ending specifying command). B002 (H) is an effect control command for specifying the start of the second big hit game (second big hit start specifying command: second fanfare specifying command). B003 (H) is an effect control command for specifying the end of the second big hit game (second big hit end specifying command: second ending specifying command). B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) for specifying the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

  The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command for opening a special winning opening) for designating a display during a round during a big hit game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed in “XX” is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening a special winning opening) for designating a display after a round during a big hit game (display of an interval between rounds).

  The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved storage number has not reached four. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 in a state where the second number of stored memories has not reached 4. Note that a command indicating the first number of reserved storages may be transmitted as the first effective start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second number of retained storages may be transmitted as the second effective start winning designation command. In the example, the first effective start prize designation command and the second effective start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

  The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that designates the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol has not been changed and the first hold storage is not stored). Wait demo display designation command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that designates a second customer waiting state (a state in which the second special symbol has not been changed and the second holding storage is not stored). Wait demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

  The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low-precision / non-KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low-precision / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the high probability / second KT state.

  The effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the first variable display section 9a and the second variable display section 9b and the display state of the background symbol display section 9c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the sound output board 70. Note that the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the big hit game and an effect control command indicating a game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S26A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 is executed.

  When performing the first special symbol process process, the CPU 56 turns on the first starting port switch 13a for detecting that a game ball has won the first starting winning port 13 provided on the game board 6. If, in other words, a start winning has occurred in which the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 13 (step S311), a first starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S312). Thereafter, the CPU 56 performs any one of steps S300 to S307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

  The processing in steps S300 to S307 is as follows.

  First special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is ready to start the variable display of the special symbol, the microcomputer 560 checks the storage number of the numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (the total reserved storage number). The number of stored numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total reserved storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the first big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The first big hit flag is reset when the big hit game ends.

  First variation pattern setting process (step S301): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, a fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) in the fluctuation pattern is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a fluctuation time timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  First display result designation command transmission process (step S302): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  First Special Symbol Changing Process (Step S303): This is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 The control for transmitting the symbol confirmation designating command is performed, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbols when the symbol control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  First special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first big hit flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S304A. If the first big hit flag has not been set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag has become 4, as described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting special symbol display control data, and in the display control process of step S22, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

  First gate passage waiting process (step S304A): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passing of the game ball to the operation gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 17 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305.

  First big win opening processing (step S305): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first special winning opening pre-opening process, control for opening the special variable winning ball device 20 is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter for counting the number of gaming balls entering the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big winning opening. Further, the execution time of the processing during opening of the first special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (the first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S306. Note that the first special winning opening opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first special winning opening opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

  First big winning opening processing (step S306): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. The control for transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 and the process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 are performed. When a game ball wins in the special winning opening and a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, a control for transmitting a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 is performed. If the closing condition of the special variable prize ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). I do. When all rounds have been completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to step S307.

  First big hit end processing (step S307): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. The control for making the effect control microcomputer 200 perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating a game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passage processing in step S312. In the starting port switch passage processing, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number). Is determined to be 4) (step S212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the first start-up switch passing processing is terminated.

  If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S213), and increases the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 20) (step S215). . In the process of step S215, a jackpot determination random number (random 1), a jackpot type determination random number (random 2), and a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 5), which are software random numbers, are extracted and stored in the storage area. . It is to be noted that the random number for random determination (random 5) is not extracted in the first start-up switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and is stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted when the first special symbol starts to change. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 5) in a first variation pattern setting process described later. You may.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to hold storage. As shown in FIG. 20, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer store a jackpot determination random number (random 1), a jackpot type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 5). Is done. Note that the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Then, control for transmitting the first valid start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 200 is further performed (step S216). The first effective start winning command includes the result of the preliminary determination.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S300) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is a case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. It should be noted that the case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300 is a state in which the first special symbol display 8a does not perform the variable display of the first special symbol, and This is the case where the game is not during the first big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times).

  In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first checks the value of the first reserved storage number (step S52A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is checked.

  If the first reserved storage number is 0, a first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S51A).

  If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and (Step S53A), decrease the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step S54A). That is, in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is converted into the first reserved storage number = n− 1 is stored in the storage area. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are always equal to the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which the random numbers are extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60A). Specifically, when the probability variable flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, it is determined to be in the low probability / non-KT state, and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued. When the 1KT flag is on, the low probability / first KT state is determined and the low probability / first KT background designation command is issued. When the probability variable flag is on and the first KT flag is on, the high probability / first If it is determined that the state is the 1KT state, the high accuracy / first KT background designation command is determined. If the probability change flag is on and the second KT flag is on, the high probability / second KT state is determined and the high probability / second KT state is determined. Send the background specification command.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is changing (step S64AA). Specifically, when the second big hit flag indicating that a big hit is set based on the change display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. If it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating, the process shifts to step S68A without performing the processes after step S64A. With this, when the change of the first special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the second special symbol, it is configured to forcibly be out regardless of whether the big hit determination value is stored.

  In addition, the method of forcibly removing is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step S64AA, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) of a hit as a big hit determination random number (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65A. Regardless of which jackpot determination random number (random 1) has been acquired at the time of the start winning, the game may be forcibly removed.

  In addition to the big hit determination, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make the small hit, if the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in the step S64AA, the steps S64A to S161A are performed. Without performing the above processing, a small random number value (fixed value) is set as a random number for small hit determination (which may be a common random number with the random number for big hit determination or a completely different random number). By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly determined to be a loss regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1) has been acquired at the time of the start winning.

  If the big hit of the second special symbol is not fluctuating, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the big hit determination random number (random 1) from the first random number storage buffer (step S64A), and executes the big hit determination module (step S64A). S65A). The big hit determination module is a program that determines a big hit when the big hit determination random number matches a predetermined big hit determination value. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S66A), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a first big hit flag indicating a big hit based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (step S67A). . Then, based on the random 2, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 16R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step S160A), the type of the jackpot is stored (step S161A), and the process proceeds to step S68A. . If it is determined in step S66A that a big hit has not occurred (that is, if a hit has occurred), the process proceeds to step S68A.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which, when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, all of the results are unconditionally determined to be a loss. I can't. For example, even if the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be configured such that a small hit may be determined with a low probability.

  Then, in step S68A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S68A). Although illustration is omitted, a symbol to be stopped immediately before step S68A is determined.

  In step S65A, in consideration of the game state, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S302) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first selects one of the variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B according to the game state. (Step S201). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in step S201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5) stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Then, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 12 is to be used (step S1700). In this example, the change time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the change pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, a variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

  When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1701).

  Also, when the variation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1700, the microcomputer 560 for game control sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first special symbol process timer to change the variation time. At the same time as the time measurement is started (step S1702), a measurement execution flag, which will be described later, is set, and the first special symbol display 8a starts the variable display of the first special symbol (step S1703). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (Step S1706).

  In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S302), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether or not to make a big hit and the big hit type determination result. Control is performed to transmit any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S303) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol change processing, the CPU 56 first decrements the first variable time timer by 1 (step S1121A). When the first variable time timer times out (step S1122A), the symbol is determined by the effect control microcomputer 200. Control for transmitting the designated command is performed (step S1123A). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (Step S304) (Step S1124A).

  When the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (step S1125A). Whether the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b is determined, for example, by setting the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, The determination can be made by confirming whether or not a second big hit flag indicating a big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. If the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the CPU 56 shifts to step S1123A and performs control to transmit a symbol fixing designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1123A). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S304) (step S1124A).

  In this embodiment, by performing the processing of steps S1125A to S1125A, if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. Is forcibly stopped to prevent a situation in which a big hit occurs in the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time. In this case, on the side of the effect control microcomputer 200, when the variable display of the first special symbol is determined to be forcible, the first variable symbol on the first variable display portion 9a is determined based on the reception of the symbol fixing designation command. The stop display of the first decorative symbol is stopped, and the control is performed so as to forcibly stop and display the off symbol as the variable display result of the first decorative symbol based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step S302.

  In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process shown in FIG. 18 and the second special symbol process shown in FIG. 28, the first start-up switch passing process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step S312). And the second start opening switch passing process (see step S322) is executed. Therefore, even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, if a new start winning is generated. It is configured to store a new hold storage.

  If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (N in step S1125A), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the KT number counter indicating the low probability / remaining number of the first KT state is “0” (step S2010). If there is, that is, if the state is not the low probability / first KT state, the process proceeds to step S2014. If the value of the KT number counter is not “0”, that is, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 56 subtracts “1” from the value of the KT number counter (step S2011), and determines whether or not the value has become “0”. Is determined (step S2012). When the value of the KT counter does not become “0”, the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT number counter becomes “0”, that is, when the 100th change of the low probability / first KT state ends, the CPU 56 resets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state ( Step S2013) and proceed to step S2014. As a result, the first KT state ends (transition to the low-probability / non-KT state) when 100 changes have been completed in the low-probability / first KT state.

  In step S2014, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step S2014). When the first big hit flag is set, if it is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability change flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, and the KT number counter (step S2015).

  Next, if not already output, the CPU 56 performs control to start external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 (see FIGS. 32 and 33) (step S2015X).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a special winning opening timer before opening (step S2017), sets opening pattern data for round 1 according to the type of big hit (step S2018), and sets “1” in the round number counter indicating the number of rounds of the big hit. Is set (step S2019), and the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step S2020).

  In this embodiment, by executing the process of step S2015X, the external output of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 can be performed even when the game ball passes through the operation gate 17 and before the big hit game is started. The external output of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 is started at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed.

  In addition, although details will be described later, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is configured to be able to execute a right strike notification that prompts the player to fire a game ball to the right of the game area 7. . In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is configured to be able to execute, as right-handed notification, a launch promotion notification that prompts the player to launch a game ball aiming at the operation gate 17.

  Conversely, when the passage of the game ball at the gate 32 or the operation gate 17 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, a low sound output or a low sound volume). (Screen display) may be configured to perform a left-hit notification that prompts the player to perform a shooting operation of a game ball to the left of the game area 7. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, a loud sound). Left-handed notification may be performed by output or large-screen display). With such a configuration, the launch notification can be accurately performed. In particular, with the above-described configuration, for a player who accidentally fires a game ball to the right of the game area 7, a slight left-handed notification is given in a mode in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is low. Thus, for a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, the left-handed notification may be performed in a manner in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt a player who intentionally performs a right-handing operation to return to a left-handing operation from a store clerk of the game store.

  Further, in the above case, when the number of detected game balls at the gate 32, the operation gate 17, the second starting winning port 14, and the special winning port 24 reaches a certain number, a left hit notification is performed. Is also good. In the gate 32 and the operation gate 17, when a game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, five times) within a predetermined period (for example, one minute), a left hit is notified, and the second starting winning port 14 and the special winning port are provided. In 24, a left hit notification may be made when a specific number (for example, one) of game balls smaller than a predetermined number is detected.

  Also, for example, while the detection of a game ball at the gate 32 or the operation gate 17 does not output an external signal, the detection of a game ball at the second starting winning port 14 or the special winning port 24 does not output an external signal. It may be configured to do so.

  In the present embodiment, the demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. However, when the demonstration display is performed in the normal state, the gate 32, the operation gate 17, the second start winning port 14 or When the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24 is detected, the execution of the demonstration display which has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be performed.

  In this embodiment, the external output of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 is executed at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. For example, the low probability / first KT state is ended before the game store closes. If the second special symbol remains to be stored later, the second special symbol may change for a long time (5 minutes), for example, in a situation where the player has finished playing the game with the closing of the game store. Since the jackpot symbol can be output externally when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed through the display, the clerk of the gaming store can be prompted to initialize the gaming machine 1 between the closing of the gaming store and the next opening. At this time, the store clerk performs initialization (RAM clear) and then opens the store.

  In addition, not only before the game store is closed, but also when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed after the player leaves the seat (for example, the second hold memory generated in the KT state is consumed in the normal state and the second special There is a case where a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed after a long-term (5 minute) fluctuation display of the symbol). In such a case, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is performed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. Since it is executed, the clerk of the game store can be prompted to initialize the gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) in the special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a detection signal has been input from the operation gate switch 17a (step S2501). If the detection signal has not been input from the operation gate switch 17a, the process is terminated. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a has been input, the CPU 56 transmits a first big hit start designation command (step S2502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first big winning opening pre-processing. The corresponding value is set (step S2503).

  In this embodiment, by executing the first gate passage waiting process, the jackpot game is not started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol, but the operation gate 17. The game ball is passed through and the condition is detected by the operation gate switch 17a.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a first special winning opening opening pre-process (step S305) in the special symbol process process. In the first special winning opening pre-opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special winning opening pre-timer by one (step S1401). When the round 1 has not started yet, the processing of step S1401 is executed, whereby the value of the special winning opening timer before opening set in step S2017 of the first special symbol stop processing is measured. The big hit display time (fan fare period) before the start of round 1 is measured. In the case of the round 1 or later, the processing of step S1401 is executed, and the value of the timer before opening the special winning opening set in the processing during opening of the special winning opening is measured. (Except after the last round)).

  In this embodiment, the case where the big hit display time (fan fare period) and the interval period are measured using a common time measurement timer is shown, but the big hit display time (fan fare period) and the interval period are separately set. The timer may be configured to measure the time.

  Next, when the timer before opening the special winning opening has timed out (the value of the time measurement timer is 0) (step S1411), the CPU 56 sets the current round number in the EXT data of the command for specifying that the special winning opening is being opened. Then, control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 200 is performed (step S1412).

  Next, the CPU 56 initializes a winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening (step S1413). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to 0.

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the special winning opening to an open state (step S1414). Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball device 20.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the opening time according to the jackpot type and the round to be started in the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening (step S1415).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening processing (step S306) (step S1416).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first big hit end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a big hit end display timer is set (step S2200A). If the big hit end display timer is set, the CPU 56 shifts to step S2204A. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the first big hit flag is reset (step S2201A), and control for transmitting the first big hit end designation command is performed (step S2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed on the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203A), and the process ends.

  In step S2204A, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S2204A). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the type of the big hit that has ended this time is the 16R probability variable big hit (step S2206A). It is to be noted that whether or not a 16R certain-variable big hit is determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability-change jackpot, the CPU 56 sets a probability-change flag indicating that the state is the probability-change state, shifts to the probability-change state (high-probability state) (step S2207A), and a second KT flag that indicates the state of the second KT. Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S2208A). Then, control goes to a step S2214A.

  If it is not the 16R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the type of the jackpot ended this time is the 6R probability variable jackpot (step S2209A). It is to be noted that whether or not a 6R probability change big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability change jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2210A), and sets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state and sets the first KT state. The process proceeds to (Step S2211A). Then, control goes to a step S2214A.

  If it is not the 6R probability variable hit (that is, if it is the 6R normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2212A). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” to a KT number counter indicating the low probability / remaining number of the first KT state (step S2213A). Then, control goes to a step S2214A.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (Step S300) (Step S2214A).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S26B) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the second special symbol processing process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is executed.

  When performing the second special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the second starting port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second starting winning port 14 provided on the game board 6. If, in other words, a start winning has occurred in which the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 14 (step S321), a second starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S322). In addition, if the "first" of the first starting port switch passing process shown in FIG. 19 is read as "second", the second starting port switch passing process will be described. Thereafter, the CPU 56 performs any one of steps S350 to S360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

  The processing in steps S350 to S360 is as follows.

  Second special symbol normal process (step S350): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is ready to start the variable display of the special symbol, the microcomputer 560 checks the storage number of the numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (the total reserved storage number). The number of stored numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total reserved storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, a second big hit flag is set. On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a big hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (the second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S351. The second big hit flag is reset when the big hit game ends. The small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

  Second variation pattern setting process (step S351): This is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, a fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) in the fluctuation pattern is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a fluctuation time timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (the second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S352.

  Second display result designation command transmission processing (step S352): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S353.

  Second special symbol change processing (step S353): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S351 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 The control for transmitting the symbol fixing designation command is performed, and the internal state (the second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbols when the symbol control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Second special symbol stop processing (step S354): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second big hit flag is set, the internal state (the second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (11 in this example) corresponding to step S354A. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S358. If neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag has been set (in the case of forced off), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is set to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S350. Update. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag has become 4, as described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting special symbol display control data, and in the display control process of step S22, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

  Second gate passage waiting process (step S354A): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for a game ball to pass to the operation gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 17 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S355.

  Second big winning opening pre-processing (step S355): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the second special winning opening pre-opening process, control for opening the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter for counting the number of gaming balls entering the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big winning opening. Also, the execution time of the second special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S356. Note that the second special winning opening opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the second special winning opening opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

  Second big winning opening opening process (step S356): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. The control for transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 and the process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 are performed. When a game ball wins in the special winning opening and a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, a control for transmitting a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 is performed. If the closing condition of the special variable prize ball device 20 is satisfied and there is still a remaining round, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S355. I do. If all rounds have been completed, the internal state (the second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to step S357.

  Second big hit end processing (step S357): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. The control for making the effect control microcomputer 200 perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating a game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (the second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Second small hit opening pre-processing (step S358): This processing is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, control for opening the special variable winning ball device 22 is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls entering the special winning opening 24) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 106 is driven to open the special variable winning ball device 22. Further, the execution time of the second small hit opening processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (the second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S359. The second small hit opening pre-process is also a process of starting a small hit game.

  Second small hit opening processing (step S359): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming that the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 22 is satisfied is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 has elapsed 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 15). When a game ball wins in the special winning opening and a game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, a control for transmitting a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 is performed. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (the second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S360 (10 (decimal number in this example)).

  Second small hit end processing (step S360): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hitting game state has ended. Then, the internal state (the second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process (step S350) in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350. It should be noted that the case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350 is a state where the second special symbol display device 8b is not displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and This is the case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened) is not performed.

  In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first checks the value of the second reserved storage number (step S52B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is checked.

  If the second reserved storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S51B).

  If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and (Step S53B), decrease the value of the second reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step S54B). That is, in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is converted into the second reserved storage number = n− 1 is stored in the storage area. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are always matched with the order of the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It has become. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which the random numbers are extracted can be specified.

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60B). The specific manner of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the processing shown in step S60A of the first special symbol normal processing.

  Next, the microcomputer 560 for game control determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating (step S64BB). Specifically, when the first big hit flag indicating that a big hit is made based on the change display of the first special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing. When it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating, the process shifts to step S68B without performing the processes after step S64B. Thus, when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the large hit of the first special symbol, it is configured to forcibly be out regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

  In addition, the method of forcibly removing is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step S64BB, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) of a loss as a big hit determination random number (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65B. Regardless of which jackpot determination random number (random 1) has been acquired at the time of the start winning, the game may be forcibly removed.

  In addition to the big hit determination, in a gaming machine that performs a small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step S64BB, steps S64B to S161B Without performing the above processing, a small random number value (fixed value) is set as a random number for small hit determination (which may be a common random number with the random number for big hit determination or a completely different random number). By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly determined to be a loss regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1) has been acquired at the time of the start winning.

  When the big hit of the first special symbol is not fluctuating, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the big hit determination random number (random 1) from the second random number storage buffer (step S64B), and executes the big hit determination module (step S64B). S65B). The big hit determination module is a program that determines a big hit when the big hit determination random number matches a predetermined big hit determination value. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S66B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a second big hit flag indicating a big hit based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (step S67B). . Then, it is determined based on the random 2 whether the jackpot type is a 16R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot (step S160B), and stores the jackpot type (step S161B). The process moves to S68B.

  If the big hit is not determined in step S66B, the game control microcomputer 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S164B), and decides to make the small hit as it is. Then, control goes to a step S68B.

  In this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, a case where all the small hits are unconditionally determined is shown (forcibly out of contact). However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even if the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed to determine whether to make a small hit. In this case, the lottery process may be executed, and a small hit may be determined with a 100% probability, or a deviation may be determined with a low probability.

  Then, in step S68B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S68B). Although illustration is omitted, a symbol to be stopped immediately before step S68B is determined.

  In step S65B, in consideration of the game state, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table.

  The second variation pattern setting process (step S351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S301) shown in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 22, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process has been described.

  In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S352), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether the result is a big hit or a small hit and the big hit type determination result. Based on this, control is performed to transmit any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200. .

  The second special symbol change processing (step S353) is the same as the first special symbol change processing (step S303) shown in FIG. That is, in the first special symbol change processing shown in FIG. 23, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol change processing has been described.

  The second gate passage waiting process (step S354A) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) shown in FIG. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 25, if "first" is read as "second", the second gate passage waiting process has been described.

  The second special winning opening pre-opening process (step S355) is the same as the first special winning opening pre-process (step S304A) shown in FIG. That is, in the first large winning opening opening process shown in FIG. 26, if "first" is replaced with "second", the second large winning opening opening process has been described.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the second big hit end process (step S357) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit end processing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200B). If the big hit end display timer is set, the CPU 56 shifts to step S2204B. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the second big hit flag is reset (step S2201B), and control for transmitting the second big hit end designation command is performed (step S2202B). Then, a value corresponding to a display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed on the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203B), and the process ends.

  In step S2204B, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by one (step S2204B). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the type of the big hit that has ended this time is the 16R probability variable big hit (step S2206B). It is to be noted that whether or not a 16R probability variable big hit is determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability change jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2207B). Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first KT state or the second KT state has been controlled before starting the current big hit (step S2208B). It should be noted that whether or not the first KT state or the second KT state has been controlled before the big hit is started is determined, for example, in the second special symbol stop processing before the big hit game is started, in the first KT state before the big hit is started. In step S2208B, it is determined whether the first KT storage flag or the second KT storage flag has been set. You only have to confirm. If neither the first KT state nor the second KT state is present before the start of the big hit, the first KT flag is set and the state shifts to the first KT state (step S2209B). If the state is the first KT state or the second KT state before the start of the big hit, the second KT flag is set and the state shifts to the second KT state (step S2210B). Then, control goes to a step S2216B.

  By executing the processing of steps S2208B to S2210B, in this embodiment, if a 16R certain-variable big hit has occurred based on the variation display of the second special symbol, if the KT state was set before the start of the big hit, Only the second KT state is set, and if the state is the non-KT state before the start of the big hit, the first KT state is set. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), a left-handed operation is performed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. It is configured assuming that. However, in the case where the 16R probability change big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the system is unconditionally shifted to the second KT state. It is possible to shift to the 2KT state, and there is a possibility that the original game performance is impaired and the gambling property is unnecessarily increased. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R certain-variable big hit has occurred based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the state shifts to the second KT state only when the KT state is set before the start of the big hit. Such a situation is prevented, and the player is prompted to perform a left-handing operation in the non-KT state.

  If it is not the 16R probability change jackpot, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the type of the jackpot ended this time is the 6R probability change hit or the 2R probability change hit (step S2211B). It is to be noted that whether or not it is the 6R probability change big hit or the 2R probability change big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability change jackpot or a 2R probability change hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2212B), and sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2212B). Step S2213B). Then, control goes to a step S2216B.

  If it is neither the 6R probability variable hit nor the 2R probability variable hit (that is, if it is the 2R normal hit), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2214B). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” to the KT counter (step S2215B). Then, control goes to a step S2216B.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step S350) (step S2216B).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of a program for a special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, whether or not the special symbol changing process is being executed) (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol change processing is being executed), the CPU 56 converts the special symbol display control data for the special symbol change display into the special symbol display control data setting. A process for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing a variable display of the special symbol. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 second, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one every 0.2 seconds. After that, a display control process (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting special symbol display control data. Variation display of special symbols on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, whether or not the special symbol stop process is being executed) (step S3203). ). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, if the process shifts to the special symbol stop process), the CPU 56 sets a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal process. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol. After that, a display control process (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting special symbol display control data. Stop symbols of the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. After the process of step S3204 is performed and the special symbol display control data for displaying the stopped symbols is set, the setting data is not changed. Therefore, the latest special symbol display control data is used in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is kept stopped until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol changing process), the special symbol change display flag is displayed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a deviation from occurring between the fluctuation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the fluctuation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, the fluctuation also occurs in the display result designation command transmission processing. The time timer may be configured to decrement by one.

  In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag has been described. However, in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of the change of the special symbol. At the same time, an end flag may be set at the end of the change of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. The special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stopped symbol may be set.

  Next, an external output signal output from the gaming machine 1 will be described. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) executes the information output processing (step S29), the processing of step S2015X in the first special symbol stop processing, and the processing in the second special symbol stop processing. By executing the same processing as in step S2015X, an external output signal is output to an external device such as a hall management computer via an external output terminal board provided in the gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for describing an external output signal output by gaming machine 1. The award ball signal is assigned to the terminal 01 of the external output terminal board. The prize ball signal is a signal that is externally output every time a predetermined number (10 in this example) of prize balls are paid out. The jackpot signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 05 of the external output terminal board. The big hit signal 1 is a signal that is continuously output externally during the entire big hit game. The jackpot signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 06 of the external output terminal board. The jackpot signal 2 is a signal that is externally output continuously during all jackpot games, during the probable change state, and during the KT state (during the first KT state and the second KT state). A special winning opening signal is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope. The special winning port winning signal is a signal that is externally output based on detection of winning of a game ball to the special winning port 24. The terminal 09 of the external output terminal board is assigned a signal of the expected number of prize balls. The prize ball expected number signal is a signal that is externally output each time the expected prize ball payout number reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example).

  In the example shown in FIG. 32, a case is shown in which a common special winning opening winning signal is externally output without distinguishing between the first KT state and the second KT state. I can't. For example, a different special winning opening winning signal may be externally output depending on whether the state is the first KT state or the second KT state. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for describing a modified example of the external output signal output from gaming machine 1. In the modification shown in FIG. 33, the special winning port signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope, and the special winning port signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 08 of the external output terminal slope. . The special winning port winning signal 1 is a signal that is externally output based on detection of a winning of a game ball to the special winning port 24 in the first KT state. The special winning opening signal 2 is a signal that is externally output based on detection of a winning of a game ball to the special winning opening 24 in the second KT state.

  In FIGS. 32 and 33, it is also possible to provide a signal for small hitting that is continuously output externally during the small hitting game.

  Next, the ordinary symbol processing (step S26C) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the ordinary symbol process process. In the normal symbol process, when the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a has been turned on (step S5111), The switch passage processing (step S5112) is executed. Then, the CPU 56 executes one of the processes shown in steps S510 to S5103 in accordance with the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  Gate switch passage processing (step S5112): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value (the number of gate passage storages) of the gate passage storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). It does not reach the maximum value, the count value of the gate passage storage counter by +1. In addition, the LED of the ordinary symbol hold storage display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number (random 4) for normal symbol determination and storing the same in a storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of gate passage storages.

  Ordinary symbol normal processing (step S5100): The CPU 56 is ready to start changing the ordinary symbol (for example, when the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is a value indicating step S100, specifically, the ordinary symbol is In the case where the display of the ordinary symbol is not displayed on the display 10 and the opening and closing operation of the variable winning ball device 15 based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 10 is not performed, the gate passage storage is performed. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of stored gate passages is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not a stop symbol of a normal symbol is a hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set in the ordinary symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the ordinary symbol variation process (step S5101).

  Ordinary symbol variation processing (step S5101): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the ordinary symbol stopped symbol display time in the ordinary symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “2”) indicating the ordinary symbol stop processing (step S5102).

  Normal symbol stop processing (step S5102): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, checks whether or not the stopped symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a lost symbol), the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the ordinary symbol normal processing (step S5100). On the other hand, if the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol, the ordinary symbol process timer is set to the time before the opening of the ordinary electric accessory, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “5”) indicating the normal electric accessory pre-opening process (step S5102A).

  Normal electric accessory opening pre-process (step S5102A): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the ordinary electric auditors operation time to the ordinary symbol process timer and sets the timer. And the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is started. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “3”) indicating the ordinary electric auditors product operation process (step S5103).

  Normal electric accessory actuation process (step S5103): The CPU 56 measures the normal symbol process timer, and closes the variable winning ball device 15 when the normal symbol process timer times out. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S5100).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the number of stored gate passages is 0 by checking the count value of the number of stored gate passages counter (step S5121). If the number of stored gate passages is 0 (Y in step S5121), the process ends. If the number of stored gate passages is not 0 (N in step S5121), the CPU 56 reads out the random number value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of stored gate passages = 1 (step S5122). Then, the CPU 56 reduces the value of the gate passage storage number counter by one and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S5123). That is, the random number for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for normal symbol determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective numbers of gate pass storage numbers are always the same as the order of the gate pass storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4 They match.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not it is a normal symbol hit using a normal symbol determination table.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a normal symbol hit determination value to be compared with a normal symbol hit determination random number (random 4) is set. And a KT normal symbol determination table used in the KT state.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in this embodiment, it is determined that a hit is made at a probability of 1/10 in the normal state and at a probability of 10/11 in the KT state. In the present embodiment, since the probability of a normal symbol hit is different between the normal state and the KT state, a start winning in the second starting winning opening 14 is more likely to occur in the KT state than in the normal state. Although the configuration is such that small hits are likely to occur, the probability of a normal symbol hit between the normal state and the KT state may be the same.

  Specifically, the CPU 56 selects the KT ordinary symbol determination table in the KT state (if the first KT flag or the second KT flag is set) (Y in step S5123A, S5123B), and in the normal state. (If the first KT flag or the second KT flag is not set), the normal ordinary symbol determination table is selected (N in step S5123A, S5123C).

  Then, in step S5124, if it is in the KT state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the random number for normal symbol determination read out in step S5122 is a value within the range of [3 to 12]. If there is, it is determined whether or not the random number for normal symbol determination read out in step S5122 is [3]. If it is a win, a winning symbol is set as a display result (step S5125), and the flow shifts to step S5130A.

  If the read normal symbol hit determination random number is not within the hit range in step S5124, the CPU 56 sets a lost symbol as a display result (step S5126), and proceeds to step S5130A.

  In step S4130A, if the first KT flag is set, the CPU 56 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y in step S5130, S5130B). If the first KT flag is not set, that is, if the state is the normal state or the second KT state, the ordinary symbol variation time is set to 1.0 seconds in the ordinary symbol process timer (N in step S5130, S5130C).

  Then, the microcomputer 560 for game control updates the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the ordinary symbol variation process (step S5101) (step S5131).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (step S5101). In the ordinary symbol variation process, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the ordinary symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out (step S5141). If the ordinary symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S5141), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the ordinary symbol process timer by one (step S5144).

  When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (Y in step S5141), the CPU 56 corresponds to 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer. The value is set (step S5142). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “2”) indicating the ordinary symbol stop processing (step S5102) (step S5143).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop processing (step S5102). In the ordinary symbol stop processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the ordinary symbol process timer by 1 (step S3701). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out (step S3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3702), the process ends.

  When the ordinary symbol process timer times out, that is, when the ordinary symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S3702), the CPU 56 determines whether the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol (step S5124). Is determined) (step S3703). It is to be noted that whether or not the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol is determined, for example, by setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined as a hit in step S5124, and confirming whether or not the flag is set. Can be.

  When it is determined that the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is not a hit symbol but a lost symbol (N in step S3703), the CPU 56 sets the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to the value indicating the ordinary symbol normal process (step S5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0" (step S3708).

  If the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol in step S3703 (Y in step S3703), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first KT flag is set (step S3704). That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 seconds is set to the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3706). If the first KT flag is not set, that is, if the normal state or the second KT state is set, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3705). .

  Next, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “5”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening pre-process (step S5102A) (step S5164).

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory opening pre-process (step S5102A). In the normal electric accessory pre-opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by one (step S3801). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out (step S3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3802), the process ends.

  When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the normal electric accessory pre-opening time has elapsed (Y in step S3802), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first KT flag is set (step S3803). If it is set, that is, if it is the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal symbol process timer (step S3805). If the first KT flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3804).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time, and in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time. By doing so, the first KT state is a state in which the second prize port 14 is easier to start and win than the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured such that the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 22 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 15 than the normal state or the second KT state.

  It should be noted that the method of controlling the second starting winning opening 14 to easily make a winning start when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to the method described in this embodiment. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened). (In the first KT state, two times are set as the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened in the first KT state.) In this case, in the first KT state, the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened can be increased so that the second winning port 14 can be easily started.

  In addition, for example, in the first KT state, compared to the normal state or the second KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be longer, and the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled. May be executed in combination with control for increasing the number of times of opening.

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to an open state (step S3806). Specifically, the solenoid 16 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 15.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the ordinary electric auditors product operation process (step S5103) (step S3807).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric auditors product operation process (step S5103). In the ordinary electric accessory operation process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the ordinary symbol process timer by one (step S3901). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the ordinary symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out (step S3902). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3901), the process ends.

  In step S3902, when the normal symbol process timer times out (Y in step S3902), the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to a closed state (step S3911). Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 16 is stopped, and the variable winning ball device 15 is closed.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S5100) (step S3912).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80. When the power is turned on, effect control CPU 201 starts executing the main process. In the main process, first, an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control is performed (step S701). Then, effect control CPU 201 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, effect control CPU 201 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 201 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 201 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, effect control CPU 201 performs a first decorative symbol process (step S705A). In the first decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 9a is executed. . In addition, a second decorative symbol process is performed (step S705B). In the second decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 9b is executed. . Further, a background symbol process for controlling the display state of the background symbol display section 9c is executed (step S706). Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display section 18c is executed (step S707). Further, a random number updating process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a random number such as a random number for announcement determination is executed (step S708). After that, the procedure moves to step S702.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six effect control commands having a 2-byte configuration is used. Therefore, the command receiving buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of the receiving command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It is not always necessary to use the ring buffer format.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed as to which command (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The interrupt processing based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt processing executed every 4 ms.

  FIGS. 43 to 45 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command receiving buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 first checks whether or not a received command is stored in the command receiving buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where they match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 201 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for adding +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), effect control CPU 201 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), effect control CPU 201 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) in RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618A).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designation command (step S619), effect control CPU 201 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been normally received. After that, the effect control CPU 201 executes a process at the time of receiving the confirmation command (step S620A).

  If the received effect control command is the first big hit start designation command or the second big hit start designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first big hit start designation command reception flag or the second big hit start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S622). In this embodiment, the first big hit start designation command reception flag and the second big hit start designation command reception flag set in step S622 are also called fanfare flags.

  After that, the effect control CPU 201 ends the instruction notification (step S3804). The instruction notification is an effect for informing how to hit the game ball, a first instruction notification for prompting the launch of the game ball substantially to the right of the game area 7, and a second instruction for prompting the launch of the game ball to the operation gate 17. An instruction notification is provided. In addition, the first instruction notification includes a first normal instruction notification that displays an image including the character “right-handed” on the entire surface of the effect display device 9, and a “right-hand operation” on a part (upper right portion) of the effect display device 9. Is provided, and the second instruction notification is to display an image including the character “Aim at the gate” on the entire surface of the effect display device 9. (2) A normal instruction notification and a second reduction instruction notification for displaying an image including the text “Aim for the gate” on a part (upper right part) of the effect display device 9 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the first instruction notification is started, and the passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is not detected until ten seconds have elapsed since the first instruction notification was started. In such a case, the image of the second instruction notification is superimposed on the image of the first instruction notification.

  Then, effect control CPU 201 resets the instruction notification timer for measuring a period until the instruction notification is switched from the first instruction notification to the second instruction notification (step S3805).

  If the received effect control command is the jackpot end designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 201 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S624A). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S624A is also referred to as an ending flag.

  If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S625), effect control CPU 201 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S627), effect control CPU 201 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a low-probability / non-KT background designation (step S630), the effect control CPU 201 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the low probability / non-KT state (for example, (The background screen of the blue display color) (step S631). If set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step S632).

  If the received effect control command is a low-probability / first KT background designation (step S633), the effect control CPU 201 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the low probability / first KT state (for example, , Green background color) (step S634). Further, effect control CPU 201 sets the first KT state flag (step S635). Further, if set, effect control CPU 201 resets the probable change state flag indicating the probable change state and the second KT state flag indicating the second KT state (step S636).

  If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background designation (step S637), the effect control CPU 201 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the high probability / first KT state (for example, , Yellow background color) (step S638). Further, effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag (step S639). If the effect control CPU 201 has been set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second KT state flag (step S640).

  If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / second KT background designation (step S641), the effect control CPU 201 sets the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the high probability / second KT state (for example, (The background screen of the red display color) (step S642). Further, effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the second KT state flag (step S643). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the first KT state flag is reset (step S644).

  If the received effect control command is the special winning opening winning command (step S650), the effect controlling CPU 201 sets the first winning ball counter and the second winning ball counter to 15 (one winning in the special winning opening). (Corresponding to the number of prize balls per game) (step S651).

  The first prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the consecutive play, and is used as a jackpot game that triggered the start of the consecutive play and all the big hit games generated in the consecutive play to the big winning opening. The prize ball based on the winning of the game ball and the probable change state in the consecutive play, the prize ball based on the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games generated in the first KT state and the second KT state. It is added as needed. The second prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the second KT state, and is a jackpot game that has triggered the start of the second KT state and all jackpot games that have occurred during the second KT state. The prize ball based on the fact that the game ball has won the big winning opening and the prize ball based on the fact that the game ball has won the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games generated in the second KT state are added as needed.

  Further, if the effect display device 9 is displaying the number of prize balls during consecutive play on the effect display device 9 indicating the number of prize balls during consecutive play, the effect control CPU 201 is based on the value of the first prize ball counter after the addition. If the display of the number of prize balls during consecutive play is updated, and if the special display during rush state indicating the number of prize balls in the second KT state is being displayed on the effect display device 9, the second prize ball counter after addition The special rush medium prize ball number display is updated based on the value of (step S652).

  If the received effect control command is the special prize mouth winning designation command (step S653), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter to 10 (1 to the special prize hole 24). (Equivalent to the number of prize balls per winning) (step S654). In addition, if the display of the number of prize balls during consecutive play is being displayed, the effect control CPU 201 updates the display of the number of prize balls during consecutive play based on the value of the first prize ball counter after the addition, and performs a special rush If the medium prize ball number display is being displayed, the special rush medium prize ball number display is updated based on the value of the second prize ball number counter after the addition (step S655).

  Next, effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S656). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to display a prize ball addition display (for example, a character display such as “+10”). (Step S657). Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the speaker 27 to output a predetermined winning sound (step S658) and turns on the special winning opening lamp 24a (step S659).

  On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (if not the second KT state), the process returns to step S611 without executing the processing of steps S657 to S659.

  By executing the processing of steps S656 to S659, in this embodiment, based on the fact that a game ball has won the special winning opening 24 during the second KT state, the display of the prize ball addition display and the output of the winning sound are performed. , And the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit, but if the game ball enters the special winning opening 24 but is not in the second KT state, the display of the prize ball adding display, the output of the winning sound, and the special winning No lighting display of the mouth lamp 24a is performed.

  It is not always necessary to perform the display of the prize-ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a, and only one or two of these are executed. May be.

  If the received production control command is the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command (step S4301), production control CPU 201 sets the first demonstration command reception flag indicating that the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command has been received. (Step S4302).

  If the received production control command is the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command (step S4303), production control CPU 201 sets the second demonstration command reception flag indicating that the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command has been received. (Step S4304).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect CPU 201 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes a process (step S670). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the processing at the time of receiving the finalized command. The effect control CPU 201 determines whether any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 6 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, and thereby the stopped and displayed symbol is the big hit symbol. It is determined whether or not (step S4401). When any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 6 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, that is, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the received symbol decision designation command is the second symbol decision designation. It is determined whether the command is a command (step S4401A), and if it is the first symbol determination designation command, the flow shifts to step S4404.

  If the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation command, effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4401B), and if it is in the KT state (the first KT flag and the second KT). If any of the flags have been set, the process moves to step S4404.

  If it is the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the ready-to-display display flag indicating that the big hit preparation display indicating that the big hit is changing has already been set is set (step S4402). If the flag is set, the ready flag is reset (step S4403), and the flow shifts to step S4404.

  In step S4404, effect control CPU 201 starts the first normal instruction notification (step S4404), and sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to the instruction notification timer (step S4406).

  Also, in step S4402, if the ready display completion flag indicating that the preparation display has been executed is not set, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first reduction instruction notification (step S4405), and proceeds to step S4406. I do. The preparation display is an effect that is executed when the change of the first special symbol is started during the change of the big bonus of the second special symbol in a normal state. The included image is an effect displayed on the effect display device 9. Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a still image including the character “Preparing for a big hit” is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. The display corresponding to the period up to (the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol) may be performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed. Further, when the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed in the KT state. Further, when the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed only when the preparation display is being performed in the normal state, and when the preparation display is not performed. Performs the first reduction instruction notification.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the background symbol processing (step S706) shown in FIG.
First, effect control CPU 201 performs instruction notification control processing for performing control relating to instruction notification (step S4501), and performs demonstration display control processing (step S4502) for performing control relating to demonstration display.

  Thereafter, effect control CPU 201 performs any one of steps S900 to S908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Background symbol change start waiting process (step S900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol change start condition is satisfied. If the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, the change is started in the background symbol display section 9c. Control. The fluctuation start condition of the background symbol is satisfied when it is confirmed that any fluctuation pattern command has been received in the command analysis processing. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start process (step S901).

  Background design variation start process (step S901): Control is performed so that the variation of the left, middle, and right background design is started. In addition, the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the fluctuation time of the background symbol is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change processing (step S902).

  Background symbol change processing (step S902): The end of the change time of the background symbol is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol stop processing (step S903). In the process of changing the background symbol, the effect control CPU 201 may extend the fluctuation time of the background symbol.

  Background symbol stop processing (step S903): Control for finally stopping the fluctuation of the background symbol and displaying the stopped symbol is performed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900), the big hit display process (step S904), or the small hit middle process (step S908). When updating to the value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S904), the big hit display process (step S904) is performed on condition that the first big hit start designation command or the second big hit start designation command is received. Update to the value corresponding to. When updating to a value corresponding to the small hitting process (step S908), the value is changed to a value corresponding to the small hitting display process (step S908) on condition that the small hit start command is received. Update.

  Big hit display processing (step S904): Big hit display is controlled. Then, upon receiving a special winning opening opening display command (a special winning opening opening display command related to the first round) indicating that the big hit game has actually started, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( The value is updated to a value corresponding to step S905).

  Processing during round (step S905): Display control during round is performed. For example, when a special winning opening display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, display control of the number of rounds is performed.

  Post-round processing (step S906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the special winning opening indicating that the special winning opening is open (during closing) is received, the interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S907): The big hit end display after the big hit game is ended is controlled. For example, when an ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) for designating the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900).

  Small hit processing (step S908): Display control during the small hit game is performed. Then, when the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the instruction notification control process. In the instruction notification control processing, effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first instruction notification is being performed (step S4601), and if the first instruction notification is being performed, decrements the value of the instruction notification timer by one (step S4602). ), It is determined whether or not the instruction notification timer times out (step S4603). If timeout has occurred (10 seconds have elapsed since the execution of the first instruction notification), the second normal instruction notification is started if the first normal instruction notification is being executed (Y in step S3503, S4605). If the first reduction instruction notification is being executed, the second reduction display notification is started (step S4506).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second instruction notification is executed 10 seconds after the start of the first instruction notification. In addition, if the first normal instruction notification is being performed, the second normal instruction notification is performed 10 seconds later, and if the first reduction instruction notification is being performed, the second reduction instruction notification is performed 10 seconds later. Becomes

  When the second instruction notification is executed, the second instruction notification image may be superimposed on the first instruction notification image, or the first instruction notification image may be deleted and the second instruction notification image may be displayed. It may be displayed.

  FIGS. 49 and 50 are flowcharts showing the demo display control process. In the demonstration display control processing, effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demonstration command reception flag is set (step S4701). If not, the process proceeds to step S4706. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4702), and if not, the flow shifts to step S4705. Specifically, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the state is the normal state.

  In the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 sets a first demonstration standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to a time (for example, 30 seconds) until the first demonstration display is started (step S4703), A first demonstration waiting flag indicating that the first demonstration display is waiting is set (step S4704). Then, the first demo reception flag is reset (step S4705).

  Thereafter, effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demonstration standby flag is set (step S4706). If it is set, the first special symbol change is started (step S4707). If Y) or if the game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the change of the second special symbol (Y in step S4708), the flow shifts to step S4712. Thus, when the first special symbol change is started or the big hit game state is controlled based on the change of the second special symbol, the first demonstration display is not executed. Specifically, in step S4707, when a variation pattern command indicating the variation of the first decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the first special symbol variation has been started. In step S4708, when the second big hit start designation command is received, it is determined that the big hit game state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol.

  When the first demonstration waiting flag is set, the first special symbol change is not started (N in step S4707), and the big hit game state is not controlled based on the change in the second special symbol (N in step S4708). Then, the value of the first demonstration standby timer is decremented by 1 (step S4709). When the first demonstration standby timer times out, the first demonstration display is started (step S4711), and the first demonstration standby flag is reset (step S4711). Step S4712).

  Thereafter, when the first demonstration is being displayed (Y in step S4713), effect control CPU 201 starts changing the first special symbol (Y in step S4714) or based on the change in the second special symbol. When the game is controlled to the big hit game state (Y in step S4715), the first demonstration display is ended (step S4716).

  Further, effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo command reception flag has been set (step S4801), and if not, the process proceeds to step S4806. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the KT state (step S4802), and if not, the flow moves to step S4805. Specifically, if any one of the first KT flag and the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the state is the KT state.

  If it is in the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 sets a second demonstration standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to a time (for example, 30 seconds) until the second demonstration display is started (step S4803), A second demonstration waiting flag indicating that the second demonstration display is waiting is set (step S4804). Then, the second demo reception flag is reset (step S4805).

  Thereafter, effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demonstration standby flag is set (step S4806). If it is set, the second special symbol change is started (step S4807). If Y) or not in the KT state (N in step S4808), the flow shifts to step S4812. As a result, when the second special symbol change is started or the KT state ends, the second demonstration display is not executed. Specifically, in step S4807, when a variation pattern command indicating the variation of the second decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the second special symbol variation has been started. In step S4808, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag has been set, it is determined that the KT state has ended.

  If the second demonstration standby flag is set, the second special symbol change is not started (N in step S4807), and if the KT state is not ended (Y in step S4808), the value of the second demonstration standby timer is set. Is subtracted by 1 (step S4809), and when the second demonstration standby timer has timed out, the second demonstration display is started (step S4811), and the second demonstration standby flag is reset (step S4812).

  Thereafter, when the second demonstration is being displayed (Y in step S4813), the effect control CPU 201 starts changing the second special symbol (Y in step S4814) or ends the KT state (step S4814). (N in S4815), the second demonstration display ends (step S4816).

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the background symbol change start process (step S901). In the background symbol change start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines a stop symbol of the background symbol (step S920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of position), only the out-of-position pattern in which the left middle right background pattern does not completely match or only the left and right background patterns match. The combination of out-of-reach symbols is determined. Also, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 16R probability variation big hit), the combination of the symbols in which the background symbols on the middle left and right are arranged in odd numbers is determined. When a display result 3 designation command or a display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit), a combination of symbols in which the left middle right background symbol is an even number symbol. To determine. When a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when a 6R ordinary jackpot or a 2R ordinary jackpot is determined), the same combination as the reach-losing symbol in which only the left and right background symbols match. To determine. When the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the background symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, “135”) is determined.

  Next, effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used, according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S921). Then, the process timer is set with the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the selected process table (step S922). Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes control of the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S923). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP 209 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern on the background symbol display unit 9c. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 70 in order to output audio from the speaker 27.

  When the execution of the continuous effect is designated in the variation pattern (in the case of the second variation patterns # 17 and # 18), step S923 and the later-described background symbol variation processing are performed according to the process table selected in step S921. By executing the processing of step S944, the continuous effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the background symbol. If the execution of the battle effect is specified in the variation pattern (in the case of the second variation patterns # 11, # 12, # 14, # 15, # 18), step S923 is performed according to the process table selected in step S921. By executing the process of step S944 of the process of changing the background symbol, which will be described later, a battle effect is executed during the change display of the background symbol.

  Next, effect control CPU 201 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the background symbol variation time timer and starts the background symbol variation time timer (step S924). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change processing (step S902) (step S925).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the background symbol changing process (step S902) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol change processing, the effect control CPU 201 first decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S940) and decrements the value of the normal symbol change time timer by 1 (step S941). When the process timer times out (step S942), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S943). Further, the control state of the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S944).

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the continuous effect is to be executed during the fluctuation display of the background symbol, and whether or not it is time to start the continuous effect (step S945). Whether or not to execute the continuous effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second variation patterns # 17 and # 18 are specified by the received variation pattern command. Whether or not the start timing of the continuous effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the background symbol variation time timer set in step S924 of the background symbol variation start process. If it is the start time of the continuous effect, the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to display the number of consecutive prize balls in the extended game based on the current value of the first prize ball counter (step S946). . In this embodiment, when the second KT state is in progress, the special rush medium prize ball number display is displayed (see step S9010 described later), but the start timing of the continuous effect in the second KT state is displayed. Then, by executing the processing of step S946, the display of the number of prize balls during consecutive rushes is displayed in addition to the display of the number of prize balls during special rush.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT shift effect is to be executed during the fluctuation display of the background symbol, and whether or not the first effect has come (step S947). Note that whether or not to execute the first KT transition effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second variation pattern # 18 is specified by the received variation pattern command. That is, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation display of the background symbol is performed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 18, whether the continuous effect is performed during the fluctuation display of the background symbol and the second KT state is continued. After the suggestion is made, the first KT transition effect is executed, and an effect is executed as if the second KT state were terminated and the first KT state was entered (however, internally at this stage, the first KT transition effect is still performed). It is at the start of the jackpot that the 2KT state has not been finished, and more precisely the 2nd KT state has been finished), and then it develops into a battle effect. Also, whether or not the first KT transition effect start timing has come can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the background symbol variation time timer set in step S924 of the background symbol variation start process.

  If it is the start timing of the first KT transition effect, the effect control CPU 201 terminates the sound output of the second KT music from the speaker 27 (step S948). That is, in this embodiment, when controlled to the second KT state, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the big hit game based on the 16R certain-variable big hit which has been triggered (step described later). (See S982), but the sound output of the music for the second KT is terminated by executing the processing of step S948.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 deletes the display of the number of prize balls during the consecutive play and the number of prize balls during the special rush on the effect display device 9 (step S949). In this embodiment, the character display such as "during special rush" is displayed in the second KT state, but in step S949, the character display such as "during special rush" is also erased.

  Next, effect control CPU 201 executes a background symbol variation time extension process (step S950). That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol is displayed. There is a possibility of starting the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel. Therefore, in this embodiment, by executing the background symbol variation time extension process of step S950, when the variation display of the background symbol is performed in response to the variation display of one special symbol, the other special symbol is displayed. When the symbol variation display is started, the variation pattern of the background symbol is replaced or the variation time is extended as necessary.

  In step S950, the effect control CPU 201, for example, when executing the variable display of the background symbol corresponding to the variable display of one of the special symbols to be lost, the variable display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is displayed. When the process is started, a process of replacing the variation pattern of the background symbol and extending the variation time is performed in accordance with the special symbol of the big hit. Also, for example, when performing the variable display of the background symbol corresponding to the variable display of one special symbol that becomes a big hit, when the variable display of the other special symbol to be lost is started, Neither replacement of the variation pattern nor extension of the variation time is performed, and the variation display of the currently executed background symbol is executed as it is. Also, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that becomes a big hit, and when the variable display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is started, it has already been described. As described above, in this embodiment, the variation display of the special symbol that is started later is forcibly removed in the middle, so that the variation pattern of the background symbol is not replaced and the variation time is not extended, and the background pattern currently being executed is not performed. The change display of the symbol is executed as it is.

  In the normal state, the CPU 201 for effect control is in the process of changing the big hit of the second special symbol, and when the change of the first special symbol is started (Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, Y in S5002), the big hit A preparation display is executed (step S5003), and a preparation display flag is set (step S5004). In step S5000, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag has been set, it is determined that the state is the normal state. In step S5001, in the second decorative symbol process process (step S705B), the process of changing the second decorative symbol is executed, and any one of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 6 designation command for the second decorative symbol is executed. If it is stored, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. In step S5002, when the change pattern command for the first special symbol is received, it is determined that the change of the first special symbol has started.

  As described above, when the change of the first special symbol is started while the big hit of the second special symbol is changed in the normal state, the change of the first special symbol is forcibly removed. At this time, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit a forced off designation command indicating that the variation of the first special symbol is forcible to the effect control microcomputer 200. In that case, the effect control The microcomputer 200 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the forced off designation command. Alternatively, only when the fluctuation display result is determined to be the forced deviation, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a special fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is not determined except for the forced deviation, and the fluctuation pattern indicating the special fluctuation pattern. A command may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 200, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the variation pattern command. Good.

  If the background symbol variation time timer has timed out (step S951), the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation stop process (step S903) (step S952). ).

  FIGS. 53 and 54 are flowcharts showing the background symbol change stop process (step S903) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol change stop process, the effect control CPU 201 first checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set (step S970A). . If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the flow shifts to step S974. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S973. Then, when executing the fanfare effect, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the big hit symbol is definitely displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is executed. The process moves to step S974 without performing.

  If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 201 checks whether the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the flow shifts to step S987. In this embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S986. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the effect during the small hit game is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol is definitely displayed, but the effect during the small hit game has not yet been executed, so that the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is set. The process proceeds to step S987 without performing the displaying process.

  If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to stop the left-center-right background symbol being stopped and displayed (losing symbol, big hit symbol). , A small hit symbol) is determined (step S971).

  When the big hit symbol is determined and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S972), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S973).

  Next, effect control CPU 201 confirms whether any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag) is set (step S974). . When any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S975). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the big hit start designation command reception flag that has been set.

  Next, effect control CPU 201 selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S976). Next, effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step S977), and the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number, sound number) In accordance with the data 1), the control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed (step S978).

  Next, effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the probability change state flag, the first KT state flag, or the second KT state flag has been set (step S979). If none of the probable change state flag, the first KT state flag, and the second KT state flag are set (that is, the low probability / non-KT state), the effect control CPU 201 resets the first award ball number counter. (Step S980). That is, since a big hit occurs in the low probability / non-KT state, a so-called first hit occurs, and the first winning ball number counter is reset.

  Next, effect control CPU 201 checks whether or not the current big hit is based on the 16R certain-variable big hit (step S981). It can be determined whether or not a 16R probability change jackpot has been received, for example, by confirming whether or not a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) for designating the 16R probability change jackpot has been received. In the case of a 16R probability change big hit, since the big hit game which is a trigger of the start of the second KT state is started, the production control CPU 201 performs control to start the sound output of the second KT music from the speaker 27 ( Step S982).

  On the other hand, if it is not the 16R probability change big hit, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second award ball counter if it is set (step S983). In other words, in this case, when the second KT state is being executed, a big hit other than the 16R certain-variable big hit occurs and the second KT state ends, so that the second winning ball number counter is reset.

  After that, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value according to the big hit display process (step S904) (step S984).

  When the small hit symbol is determined and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S985), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S986).

  Next, effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S987). When the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S988). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the small hit start designation command reception flag that has been set.

  Next, effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag has been set (step S989). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if the state is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table corresponding to the small hit effect (step S990). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step S991), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number, sound number) According to the data 1), the control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed (step S992).

  The effect control CPU 201 causes the speaker 27 to output a predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning prize ball device 22 (step S993), and causes the special winning opening lamp 24a to be lit (step S994).

  On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the second KT state), the process shifts to step S995 without executing the processing of steps S990 to S994. By performing the determination processing of step S989, in this embodiment, the effect during the small hitting game is executed only when the small hitting game is performed during the second KT state, and the special variable winning ball device 22 A predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening is output, and the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit.

  In this embodiment, a case where a predetermined opening sound is output and the special winning opening lamp 24a is lighted and displayed when a small hit occurs during the second KT state is shown. I can't. For example, it may be configured to execute only one of the output of the predetermined opening sound and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a. Further, for example, even during the second KT state, neither the output of the predetermined opening sound nor the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a may be executed, and the production during the small hit game in the first place. Alternatively, it may be configured not to execute the small hitting processing itself.

  Then, effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value according to the small hitting middle process (step S908) (step S995).

  If the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S971 (that is, if a missing symbol is displayed) (N in step S972 and N in step S985), the effect control CPU 201 sets the background symbol. The value of the process flag is updated to a value according to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S996).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S907) in the background symbol process process. In the big hit end production process, the production control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the value of the production period measurement timer (step S9000). The effect period measurement timer is set in the post-round processing (see step S906) based on the completion of all rounds of the big hit game. Next, the effect control CPU 201 checks whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S9001).

  When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9002), and according to the content of the process data n, the effect device (effect display device 9). , The speaker 27, etc.) (step S9003). For example, effects such as displaying that the big hit is finished or displaying a predetermined character are executed.

  Then, effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9004), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9005). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9006).

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the big hit game to be ended this time is based on the 6R probable big hit or the 2R probable big hit (step S9007). ). It should be noted that whether a 6R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit is determined by, for example, a display result designation command (display result 3 designation command) for designating a 6R probability variation hit or a display result designation command (display result 5) for designating a 2R probability variation jackpot. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the specified command has been received. If it is a 6R probable jackpot or a 2R probable jackpot (that is, if the game is in the high probability state / first KT state after the end of the jackpot game), the effect control CPU 201 returns to the effect display device 9 if it is not displayed. Based on the first prize ball number counter, control is performed to start the display of the number of prize balls during consecutive play (step S9008). In step S9008, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "during normal rush".

  If it is neither the 6R probability variable jackpot nor the 2R probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 201 checks whether or not the jackpot game to be ended this time is based on the 16R probability variable jackpot (step S9009). It can be determined whether or not a 16R probability change jackpot has been received, for example, by confirming whether or not a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) for designating the 16R probability change jackpot has been received. If it is a 16R probability change big hit (that is, if the high probability state / the second KT state is reached after the big hit game ends), the effect control CPU 201 displays the second prize ball on the effect display device 9 if it is not displayed. The control for starting the display of the special rush medium prize ball number display based on the number counter is performed (step S9010). In step S9010, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying characters such as "during special rush".

  Although not shown in FIG. 55, if the big hit game that ends this time is based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit (that is, the low probability state / the first KT state after the big hit game ends) If it is, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying character display such as “chance time”.

  Then, effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value according to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S9011).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the small hit processing (step S908) in the background symbol processing. In the small hit processing, the effect control CPU 201 first checks whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S9201). If the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, if the small hit end designation command has not been received yet), the effect control CPU 201 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S9202). Then, a process of controlling the effect devices (effect display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) is executed according to the contents of the process data n (step S9203). That is, the effect corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

  However, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the second KT state is not in progress, the process table corresponding to the small hitting medium effect is not set in the first place (see step S989), so the small hitting end designation command is received. Even if it is not performed, the effect corresponding to the small hit game is not executed.

  Then, effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9204), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9205). Then, the process timer is set by setting the process timer set value in the next process data to the process timer (step S9206).

  When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 ends the effect corresponding to the small hit game, and step S9207. Move to Then, effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S9207).

  FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples of instruction notification according to the present embodiment. The display example shown in FIG. 57 shows a display example of an instruction notification in the case of a big hit based on a change in the first special symbol. For example, first, the background symbol corresponding to the first decorative symbol is variably displayed as shown in FIG. 57 (1), and the background symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol as shown in FIG. 57 (2). Next, a first normal instruction notification 55A is performed as shown in FIG. At this time, the first normal instruction notification 55 </ b> A is performed by displaying an image including the characters “right-handed” and a right arrow. Then, when 10 seconds elapse without the game ball passing through the operation gate 17, the second normal instruction notification 55B is performed as shown in FIG. 57 (4).

  At this time, the second normal instruction notification 55B includes a character “Aim at the gate” and an image showing a game ball passing through the operation gate 17 (a rectangular area through which the game ball passes indicates the operation gate 17). , And the square area above it indicates the gate 32).

  The display example shown in FIG. 58 shows a display example of the instruction notification in the case where a big hit occurs based on the change of the second special symbol in the normal state. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (1), the first demo symbol is not changed in spite of the normal state, the first demonstration display is performed, and the big hit change of the second decorative symbol is performed. Has been done. Then, when the change of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (2), a jackpot preparation display is performed and a preparation display completed flag is set, and then, as shown in FIG. 58 (3). As shown, the change of the second special symbol ends at the big hit symbol. At this time, when the display flag under preparation is set, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (4), and when 10 seconds elapse without the game ball passing through the operation gate 17. Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (5), a second normal instruction notification 56B is performed. At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A and the second normal instruction notification 56B may be displayed separately in parallel, or only the second normal instruction notification 56B is displayed without displaying the first normal instruction notification 56A. May be.

  At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed by displaying an image including the character “right-handed” and a right arrow, and the second normal instruction notification 56B is generated by displaying the character “Aim at the gate” By displaying an image showing a game ball passing through the gate 17 (a square area through which the game ball passes indicates the operation gate 17, and a square area above it indicates the gate 32) Done.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (6), when the change of the second special symbol is completed in the big hit symbol without the change of the first special symbol, the first reduction is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (7). The instruction notification 56C is performed, and when 10 seconds have elapsed without the game ball passing through the operation gate 17, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed as illustrated in FIG. 58 (8).

  At this time, the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed by displaying only the image indicating the character “Right-handed”. In addition, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed by displaying only an image indicating the character “Aim at the gate”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit change of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, when the change of the first special symbol is performed, the big hit preparation display is performed, and the change of the first special symbol is changed. Is not performed, the execution of the jackpot preparation display is restricted (not executed).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit change of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, when the change of the first special symbol is performed, the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification are performed. Is performed, and when the first special symbol is not changed, the first reduction instruction notification and the second reduction instruction notification with lower visibility than the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification are performed.

  FIG. 59 is a timing chart when the big hitting game state ends and the state is controlled to the first KT state. The timing chart shown in FIG. 59 shows whether the big hit game state is controlled, whether or not the first KT flag is set, whether or not the normal symbol change is executed, whether or not the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, and whether or not the second special symbol is changed. , And whether or not the special variable winning prize ball device 22 is opened is shown for each timing.

  For example, while being controlled to the big hit game state (before the timing T0 in FIG. 59), the normal symbol fluctuation time is 1.0 second, the normal symbol fluctuation stop time is 0.2 second, and the normal symbol is hit. In this case, 2.6 seconds are set as the time before the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, and 0.2 seconds are set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the big hit gaming state is 1.0 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, and 0.2 seconds, which is the symbol fixing period of the ordinary symbol, This is 3.8 seconds obtained by adding 2.6 seconds, which is the time before the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. Note that while the big hit game state is being controlled, the special symbol is not changed and the special variable winning prize ball device 22 is not opened.

  During the control in the first KT state (after the timing T0 in FIG. 59), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, the fluctuation stop time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol is hit. In this case, 0.1 seconds is set as the time before the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, and 5.5 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable prize ball device 15 while being controlled to the big hit gaming state is 0.2 seconds which is a fluctuation time of a normal symbol and 0.2 seconds which is a symbol confirmation period of a normal symbol, This is 0.5 seconds obtained by adding 0.1 seconds, which is the time before the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. In addition, 7.0 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol after being controlled to the first KT state, and 0.8 seconds is set as the opening time of the special variable prize ball device 22 at the time of the small hit, and the first KT state 1.0 second (assuming that the number of second reserved storages ≧ 1) is set as the variation time of the second special symbol from the second time onward.

  At this time, the first special symbol change time (7 seconds) after the first KT state is controlled is shorter than the closing period (3.8 seconds) of the variable winning ball device 15 while the big hit game state is being controlled. .0 seconds) is longer. This is because, for example, when waiting before opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is started immediately before the timing T0, it is assumed that the variable winning ball device 15 is closed for a maximum of 2.6 seconds. If the fluctuation time of the second special symbol for the first time after the control in the first KT state is too short, the special variable prize ball device 22 is controlled to be open while the variable prize ball device 15 is closed, It is conceivable that a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 22 in spite of the first KT state. Therefore, the variable time of the second special symbol is extended so that the special variable winning ball device 22 is not controlled to be opened while the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, a game machine that can execute a game using a game medium (in this example, a game ball) is provided. (In this example, provided in the right of the game area 7), a specific area (in this example, the operation gate 17) through which the game medium can pass, and a predetermined condition (in this example, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed). Is established, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the game medium passing through the specific area (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560). If Y in step S2501, steps S305 to S307 and steps S355 to S357 are executed), a predetermined state that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state (in this example, the small hit game state) ) (In this example, a portion for executing steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560), and in a special state (in this example, KT State) (in the present example, a portion that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560), and based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the control to the predetermined path. A predetermined promotion notification (first instruction notification in this example) for promoting the emission of the game medium is executed, and after a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification, the game to the specific area is performed. It is possible to execute a specific promotion notification (in this example, a second instruction notification) for promoting the emission of the medium (in this example, production Step in patronage microcomputer 200 S4404, S4405, S4604, portions for performing the S4605) was decided. Thus, it is possible to appropriately notify a trigger for controlling to an advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the effect.

  For example, in JP-A-2006-202287, it is possible to control to a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stop display of a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. After that, a gaming machine that controls the game machine to be in an advantageous state (big hit game state) when a game medium passes through a specific area is described, and the gaming machine appropriately notifies the opportunity to control to an advantageous state. However, if the notification for prompting the emission of the game medium to the specific area is performed every time the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect may be complicated. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify a trigger for controlling to an advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the effect.

  For example, if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol after the KT state ends and the normal state is entered, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is long. It is assumed that the player leaves the seat for a reason such as a break without waiting for the fluctuation of the game to end. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to control not to enter the big hit gaming state during a break by appropriately notifying the trigger for controlling the big hit gaming state.

  Also, unlike the above-described gaming machine, there is a gaming machine configured to control the big hit gaming state on condition that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of whether the game ball passes through the operation gate 17 or not. The player waits until the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed until the big hit game state is started (until the big winning opening is opened) for the purpose of suppressing unnecessary hitting of the game ball, and then launches the game ball. May be performed. Similarly, in a gaming machine which shifts to the big hit game state on condition that the game ball passes through the operation gate 17, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed until the big hit game state is started. There is a case where it is attempted to wait for launch, in which case the big hit gaming state is not started. Therefore, with the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify such a player of an opportunity to control the big hit game state.

  Further, specific examples of the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification are not limited to those described above. Specifically, an effect using an effect member other than the effect display device 9 (for example, a light emitting member such as the speaker 27, the game effect lamp 9, and the decoration LED) may be used as the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification. In addition, an effect using a plurality of effect members may be performed as the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification. The effect members used as the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification may be different from each other. For example, the predetermined effect notification may cause the game effect lamp 9 to emit light, and the specific effect notification may cause the effect display device 9 to display a predetermined screen.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the advantageous state signal (in this example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) which can specify that the control is made to the advantageous state can be externally output (in this example, the game control). In step S2015X and the second special symbol stop process in the microcomputer 560, the same process as that in step S2015X is executed), and the advantageous state signal can be externally output based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (in this example, The game control microcomputer 560 executes step S2015X before executing step S2501 in the first special symbol stop process and the second special symbol stop process. As a result, it is possible to notify the gaming clerk that the unmanned gaming machine having no player has become advantageous, and to promote initialization of the gaming machine.

  Although the description is omitted in this embodiment, if a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, it may be possible to notify that fact (in this example, the game control When the power is cut off before the game ball passes the operation gate 17 after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the microcomputer for use 560 waits for the current situation (waiting for the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 17). (In this example, the value of the special symbol process flag “8” corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process) is backed up, and if the information is backed up when the power is turned on, The predetermined command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200. When the effect control microcomputer 200 receives the predetermined command, the first instruction notification, the second instruction notification, Others may be informed of the establishment of a predetermined condition by executing an effect that may be executed only when the power is turned on). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify a trigger for controlling to an advantageous state.

  Although the description is omitted in this embodiment, the specific promotion notification may be executed in a different manner depending on the situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied. The second instruction notification may be executed in a different manner according to the type of big hit and the game state.) As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify a trigger for controlling to the advantageous state according to the situation.

  Specifically, when the fluctuation is performed using the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the jackpot, a battle effect is performed in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other as the effect of the fluctuation, and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed before the win or loss of the confrontation is indicated. At the same time, the display of "Aim for the gate" is displayed, and in the subsequent jackpot game state, the battle effect is continued as the big hit effect (that is, the variable effect and the big hit effect are a series of battle effects). Good. At that time, if the jackpot is of an advantageous type (for example, a jackpot having a large number of rounds, a jackpot having a long winning opening open period, a jackpot shifting to a positive change state, or a jackpot shifting to a KT state), the battle is won. If a jackpot of an unfavorable type (for example, a jackpot with a small number of rounds, a jackpot in which the opening period of the winning port is short, a jackpot that does not shift to the probable change state, or a jackpot that does not shift to the KT state) is determined to be defeated in the battle. Is also good.

  Although description is omitted in this embodiment, variable display of first identification information (in this example, first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (in this example, second special symbol) are executed. It is possible (in the present example, a portion that executes steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560), and the first effect identification information (in this example, the first decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. , The display result can be derived and displayed, and the second effect identification information (in this example, the second decoration in this example) corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) is displayed. The display result can be derived and displayed by executing the variable display of the symbol (symbol) (in the present example, the portion that executes steps S705A and S705B in the effect control microcomputer 200). The variable display of the effect identification information may be made difficult to visually recognize, and the display result of the variable display of the second effect identification information may be made easily visible (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 is in a normal state. The second decorative symbol may be erased while the second special symbol is changing, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed when the second special symbol is stopped. Thus, in the normal state, attention can be paid to the variable display of the first identification information.

  In the normal state, the display result of the change of the second decorative symbol and the display related to the number of the second reserved storages may be made difficult to see.

  In addition, being difficult to visually recognize is a concept including being invisible and difficult to be visually recognized.

  Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, a game machine that can execute a game using a game medium (in this example, a game ball) is provided, and the specific area ( In this example, the operation gate 17), the variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) can be executed. At the same time, the variable display of the other of the first identification information and the second identification information can be executed during the execution of the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information (in this example, the game control micro By executing steps S26A and S26B in the computer 560, a portion in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, a predetermined condition (in this example, the big hit symbol is Stop display Is established, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the game medium passing through the specific area (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560). If Y in step S2501, steps S305 to S307 and steps S355 to S357 are executed), it is possible to control to a predetermined state (small hitting game state in this example) which is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state. (In this example, a part for executing steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560), it can be controlled to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of controlling to a predetermined state is higher than that in a normal state. Yes (in the present example, steps S2208A, S2211A, 2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B), and a specific promotion notification (in this example, a second instruction notification) that promotes the emission of the game medium to a specific area can be executed based on a predetermined condition being satisfied. (In the present example, the part that executes steps S4604 and S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200), and the absence condition corresponding to the absence of the player (in the present example, even though the normal state, When the first condition is not fulfilled, the specific promotion notification is executed in a predetermined manner based on the predetermined condition being satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second notification is not executed). (2) normal instruction is notified), and when the absence condition is satisfied, the second identification information is variably displayed, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. The specific promotion notification is performed in a special mode having lower visibility than the fixed mode (in this example, the second reduction instruction notification is performed). Thereby, the specific promotion notification for promoting the emission of the game medium to the specific area can be appropriately performed in consideration of the absence condition being satisfied.

  For example, in JP-A-2006-202287, it is possible to control to a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stop display of a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. After the game machine passes through the specific area, the gaming machine is controlled to be in an advantageous state (big hit game state) when the game medium passes, but the gaming machine promotes the emission of the game medium to the specific area. There was a possibility that the specific promotion notification could not be properly performed. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately perform the specific promotion notification that promotes the emission of the game medium to the specific area in consideration of the absence condition being satisfied.

  For example, even if the absence condition is satisfied (when there is no player), if the gaming machine performs the second normal instruction notification (notification in the entire display area of the effect display device 9), the game ends last. Despite the fact that the final player who has performed the game has already ended the game, the other players are in a case where the final player has temporarily left the seat and played the game of the gaming machine. It is considered that the player may develop a trouble, and a new player may avoid playing a game with the gaming machine. Therefore, as in the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment, by performing the specific promotion notification in a manner according to the situation, it is possible to eliminate the shyness of a new player and to promote the operation of the gaming machine. be able to.

  In addition, there are those who want to enjoy an advantageous situation (big hit game state) generated based on the game by the player who has finished the game, and if such an action is performed, the fairness of the game is lacking Becomes Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the absence condition is satisfied (when there is no player), a special mode having lower visibility than when the absence condition is not satisfied (when there is a player) is provided. By executing the specific promotion notification at, it is difficult for the user to recognize that it is a stage before an advantageous situation is attained, and the fairness of the game can be secured.

  In the present embodiment, the absence of the change of the first special symbol in the normal state is referred to as “absence condition” (exactly, the change of the first special symbol is started in the normal state). When the absence condition is no longer satisfied), but is not limited thereto. For example, the player does not touch the hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 or any of the regions (the operation gate 17, the gate 32, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, the large winning opening, Not detecting the passage of the game ball to the special winning opening 24) for a predetermined period may be set as the “absence condition”. Further, for example, the absence of a start winning prize before a predetermined period (for example, two minutes) elapses after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command may be set as the “absence condition”.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the absence condition is satisfied, the absence effect indicating that the absence condition is satisfied regardless of whether the specific promotion notification is performed in a predetermined manner (in the present example, , The first demonstration display) (in this example, the part that executes step S4716 in the effect control microcomputer 200). Thereby, the player can be appropriately encouraged to play the game.

  Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, it is controlled to a power saving state in which the consumed power is reduced on condition that a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed since the start of the demonstration display. It may be. In the power saving state, the sound volume output from the speaker 27 is reduced, the brightness of the image display device 5 is reduced, and the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED is reduced to be consumed in each effect member. The power is reduced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game and the execution of the effect are controlled based on the information transmitted from the game control means. Effect control means (in this example, effect control microcomputer 200), and the game control means includes first absence information (in this example, indicating whether an absence condition is satisfied based on the first identification information). , A first customer waiting demo display designation command) and second absence information (in this example, a second customer waiting demo display designation command) indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the second identification information. It is possible to transmit (in this example, the part that executes steps S51A and S51B in the game control microcomputer 560). As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

  In the present embodiment, a first customer waiting demonstration display designation command indicating whether or not the absence condition is established based on the first special symbol, and whether the absence condition is established based on the second special symbol. The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command indicating whether or not the command has been provided is provided separately. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A command indicating whether the absence condition is satisfied based on the first special symbol, A common command may be provided as a command indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the second special symbol. For example, in a normal state, when the first special symbol is not stored and the first special symbol is not changed (regardless of the presence or absence of the second special symbol and whether or not the second special symbol is stored). The common command is transmitted, and in the KT state, when the second special symbol is not changed and the second special symbol is not changed (whether the first special symbol is changed or the first special symbol is not stored). The common command may be transmitted (regardless of presence or absence).

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control means for controlling the progress of the game, and the effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on information transmitted from the game control means, the game control means, Special state control information (in this example, a background designation command) indicating whether or not a special state is being controlled, and absence information (in this example, a first customer waiting demonstration display) indicating whether or not an absence condition is satisfied A designation command, a second customer waiting demonstration display designation command) can be transmitted (in this example, a portion that executes steps S51A, S51B, S60A, and S60B in the game control microcomputer 560), and the effect control means is special. It is possible to execute an absence effect indicating that the absence condition is satisfied based on the state control information and the absence information (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 20). At the step S4502, and the executable portion) that the plying demonstration display on the basis of the background specified command and plying demonstration display instruction command. As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the hold storage capable of storing, as the hold storage (in this example, the second hold storage), the information indicating whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information. Means (in this example, a second holding storage buffer), and it is possible to execute an advantageous information effect (in this example, a big hit effect) indicating that the control is performed in an advantageous state (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200). ), The variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the on-hold storage indicating the control to the advantageous state is started during the execution of the variable display of the first identification information to be controlled to the advantageous state. In this case, the advantage notification effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is not executed (in this example, if the game control microcomputer 560 is Y in step S64BB, By not performing the processing after step S65B, even if the jackpot random number is stored as the second hold storage, the fluctuation with respect to the second hold storage is forcibly made to be out, and the effect control microcomputer 200 (2) No jackpot effect related to the identification information is executed). As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

  Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of executing a game, and includes variable display of first identification information (in this example, first special symbol) and second identification information. (In this example, the variable display of the second special symbol) can be performed, and the display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be performed during the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information. The other variable display can be executed (in this example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel by executing steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560). The specific display result (in this example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as one of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Tsuzuki (In this example, a portion that executes steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the first state. It is advantageous and advantageous for the player based on the fact that a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as one of the variable display of the identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hitting game state) (in this example, a part of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes steps S358 to S360), and is controlled to a predetermined state than the normal state. It can be controlled to a special state (in this example, the KT state) in which the frequency of playing is increased (in this example, the game control microcomputer). (Steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B) in the data 560), and a notification effect (in this example, a display indicating that a big hit is being prepared) for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the example, the part for executing step S5003 in the effect control microcomputer 200) In the normal state, when the absence condition corresponding to the absence of the player is not satisfied, the predetermined condition is satisfied by variably displaying the second identification information. Based on this, the notification effect can be executed (in the present example, the effect control microcomputer 200 executes S5003 when Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, and Y in S5002), and in the normal state. Changing the second identification information when the absence condition is satisfied Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the display, the execution of the notification effect is limited (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 executes S5003 when Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, and N in S5002). do not do). Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition has been satisfied in consideration of the absence condition being satisfied.

  For example, in JP-A-2006-202287, it is possible to control to a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stop display of a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. After that, a gaming machine is described which controls the game machine to enter an advantageous state (big hit game state) when a game medium passes through a specific area. However, the gaming machine appropriately notifies the user that a predetermined condition has been satisfied. There was a possibility that it could not be performed. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition has been satisfied in consideration of the absence condition being satisfied.

  Note that "restrict execution" means not to execute as in the present embodiment, or to execute in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize (for example, executing the notification effect using an image smaller than normal or an image with low density). Or performing a notification effect of outputting a sound at a volume lower than normal).

  Further, specific examples of the notification effect are not limited to those described above. Specifically, an effect using an effect member other than the effect display device 9 (for example, a light emitting member such as the speaker 27, the game effect lamp 9, and the decoration LED) may be used as the notification effect. In addition, an effect using a plurality of effect members may be performed as the notification effect.

  Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and the game medium (in this example, A variable starting device (in this example, a variable starting device (in this example) capable of changing between an entry advantageous state (in this example, an open state) in which a game ball) can enter and a disadvantageous state (in this example, a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter , A variable winning ball device 15) and a predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) that is provided downstream of the variable starting device and that can be changed between an entry advantageous state and an entry disadvantaged state, The variable starter can be controlled to change to an entry advantageous state or an entry disadvantage state (in this example, a portion for executing step S5103 in the game control microcomputer 560), and first identification information (in this example, a first special symbol). ) Variable table Can be executed, and the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) can be executed based on the game medium entering the variable starting device (in this example, the game control A part for executing steps S26A and S26B in the microcomputer 560) and a holding storage means (in this example, the second holding storage) capable of storing information relating to the variable display of the second identification information as holding storage (in this example, second holding storage). And a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information, based on the fact that the display result is a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit symbol). The predetermined variable device can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hitting game state) in which the predetermined variable device is changed to an approaching advantageous state (in this example, a game control microcomputer 560) (Steps S358 to S360 are executed), and it can be controlled to a special state (in this example, KT state) in which the frequency of controlling to a predetermined state is higher than that in a normal state (in this example, a game control microcomputer) Steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B in 560) The special state is a first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and a degree of advantage over the first special state. Can be controlled to a second special state with a high probability (in this example, high probability / second KT state), and when controlled to an advantageous state, during a specific period longer than when controlled to a first special state. The variable starter can be controlled to change to the disadvantageous state over this period (in this example, the step S26 in the game control microcomputer 560). By executing C, as shown in FIG. 59, the variable prize ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds in the big hit game state, and the variable prize ball device 15 is controlled for 0.5 second in the first KT state. A part for controlling to the closed state), and as the variable display of the first second identification information controlled to the first special state, the variable display for the first period is executed irrespective of the number of reserved storages stored in the reserve storage means. (In the present example, the microcomputer 560 for game control is controlled to the first KT state, and in the first variation, the variation pattern is changed using the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13D or 14G. By deciding, the second special symbol can be changed for 7.0 seconds regardless of the number of retained storages), and the variable display of the second identification information after the second time is controlled by the first special state. , If the number of storages stored in the holding storage means in one special state is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the variable display of the second period shorter than the first period can be executed (in this example, the microcomputer for game control) Reference numeral 560 denotes a state in which the second hold storage number is 1 or more by controlling the first KT state and determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 13E or FIG. If so, the second special symbol can be changed for 1.0 second (a time shorter than the first change time of 7.0 seconds controlled by the first KT state). Thereby, interest in the special state can be improved.

  For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 discloses a variable starter (attacker) capable of changing between an advantageous state in which game media can enter and a disadvantageous state in which game media cannot enter or is difficult to enter. A gaming machine that changes a predetermined variable device to an entry advantageous state in a state, and is controllable to a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to a small hitting gaming state is increased, and the predetermined variable device is controlled to an entry disadvantageous state. A gaming machine is described in which a game medium flowing down on the predetermined variable device is sometimes delayed so that the game medium can easily enter the predetermined variable device in the small hitting game state and the degree of advantage in the special state is increased. However, the gaming machine had a monotonous game in a special state, and was not sufficiently interesting. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve interest in a special state.

  For example, in this embodiment, when the first KT state is controlled, although the frequency of small hits increases, the opening time of the variable prize ball device 15 is lengthened to actually increase the special variable prize ball device 22. The special winning opening 24 is set so that it rarely wins. However, in the state immediately after the shift to the low probability / first KT state, the special winning opening 24 is placed on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22 to some extent. Game balls may be accumulated, and if the special variable winning ball device 22 is immediately controlled to the open state, a considerable number of gaming balls may win in the special winning opening 24. . Therefore, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, it is accumulated on the bottom member of the variable prize ball device 15 or the special variable prize ball device 22 before shifting to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable prize ball device 22 to be in an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all of the game balls that have fallen and allowing the prize to enter the special prize port 24, the first KT state is more than expected. This prevents a situation in which a prize ball can be obtained.

  In addition, when a plurality of special states (first KT state, second KT state) are provided, a game ball to a predetermined variable device (special variable prize ball device 22) in some special states (first KT state) is provided. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the partial special state (first KT state) can be set to a special state with a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to achieve a different degree of advantage for a plurality of special states.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the variable display of the first second identification information controlled to the first special state is the first variable display of the second identification information which is longer than the specific period regardless of the number of storages stored in the storage means. The variable display for one period can be executed (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the first change, the change pattern shown in FIG. 13D or FIG. 14G). By determining the fluctuation pattern using the table, the second special symbol is displayed for 7.0 seconds (a time longer than 3.8 seconds of closing of the variable winning ball device 15 in the big hit game state) regardless of the number of retained memories. The first special state is controlled, and the variable display of the second identification information for the second and subsequent times is controlled by the first special state. If it is above, the variable display of the second period shorter than the specific period can be executed (in this example, the microcomputer 560 for game control is controlled to the first KT state, and in the second and subsequent fluctuations, FIG. E) or by using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 14 (H) to determine the fluctuation pattern, if the second reserved storage number is 1 or more, 1.0 second (the variable winning ball device 15 in the big hit game state). The change of the second special symbol can be performed over a closing time of 3.8 seconds). Thereby, interest in the special state can be improved.

  Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, when the display is controlled to the second special state, regardless of the number of times the second identification information is variably displayed after the control to the second special state, the hold is performed. The variable display of the second identification information may be executed at different fluctuation times based on the number of suspended storages stored in the storage means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is in the second KT state in the second KT state). 2 When changing the special symbol, regardless of the number of changes executed after being controlled to the second KT state, the second special symbol is changed for one second if the second reserved storage number is 1 or more, If the second reserved number is 0, the second special symbol may be changed for 3 seconds.) Thereby, interest in the special state can be improved.

  Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the identification information (in this example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is variably displayed, and an advantageous state (in this example) advantageous to the player is provided. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state, a special area (in this example, a gate 32) through which a game medium (in this example, a game ball) can pass, and an entry advantage in which the game medium can enter. A variable starting device (in this example, a variable prize ball device 15) capable of changing between a state (in this example, an open state) and a state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter (in this example, a closed state); A predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) that is provided downstream of the variable starting device and that can be changed between an entry advantageous state and an entry disadvantaged state, and that the game medium has passed through the special area. Based on the normal identification information (in this example, a normal design) It is possible to execute a variable display (in this example, a portion for executing steps S510 to S5102 in the game control microcomputer 560), and to change the variable starting device to the entry advantageous state based on the variable display of the ordinary identification information. It is possible (in the present example, the step of executing the step S5103 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the variable display of the identification information can be executed based on the game medium entering the variable starting device (in this example, it is possible). A portion for executing step S26B in the game control microcomputer 560), and enters the predetermined variable device based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit symbol). It can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hitting game state) that changes to an advantageous state. Can be controlled to a special state (in this example, the KT state) in which the frequency of controlling to the predetermined state is increased (in this example, the game state). A part for executing steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B in the control microcomputer 560) as a special state, a first special state (in this example, a high probability / first KT state) and the first special state It can be controlled to a second special state (in this example, high probability / second KT state) having a higher degree of advantage than the special area in the first special state when the variable display of the ordinary identification information is not performed. The variable starting device is controlled so that the game medium that has passed through the variable starting device can enter the variable starting device (in this example, the game ball The minimum required time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to the variable prize ball device 15 is 0.6 seconds, and in the first KT state, the variable prize is 0.5 seconds after the game ball passes through the gate 32. By controlling the ball device 15 to the open state, when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the first KT state, and when the winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, the one game ball can be changed as it is. It is possible to win the winning ball device 15). Thereby, interest in the special state can be improved.

  For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 discloses a variable starter (attacker) capable of changing between an advantageous state in which game media can enter and a disadvantageous state in which game media cannot enter or is difficult to enter. A gaming machine that changes a predetermined variable device to an entry advantageous state in a state, and is controllable to a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to a small hitting gaming state is increased, and the predetermined variable device is controlled to an entry disadvantageous state. A gaming machine is described in which a game medium flowing down on the predetermined variable device is sometimes delayed so that the game medium can easily enter the predetermined variable device in the small hitting game state and the degree of advantage in the special state is increased. However, the gaming machine had a monotonous game in a special state, and was not sufficiently interesting. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve interest in a special state.

  For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, in the first KT state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the variation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable symbol is a variable winning prize ball in a state where the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped and the status of the ordinary symbol is not stored. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. The variable prize ball device 15 does not open until the game ball that has passed through reaches the variable prize ball device 15 or the special variable prize ball device 22, so that the special prize port 24 can be won. On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning prize ball device 15 is opened before the game ball reaches the variable prize ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32. Since it is set to be started, it is possible to eliminate a capture element by a shooting operation aiming at a small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

  In addition, when a plurality of special states (first KT state, second KT state) are provided, a game ball to a predetermined variable device (special variable prize ball device 22) in some special states (first KT state) is provided. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the partial special state (first KT state) can be set to a special state with a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to achieve a different degree of advantage for a plurality of special states.

  Further, according to this embodiment, in the second special state, the variable starting device is controlled to be in the disadvantageous state for a longer period than in the first special state (in this example, the microcomputer 560 for game control includes: In the first KT state, the variable prize ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 0.5 second as shown in FIG. 15A, and in the second KT state, the variable prize ball device 15 is controlled in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. The closed state is controlled for 3.8 seconds), and the variable starting device is controlled so that the game medium that has passed through the special area is difficult to enter the variable starting device when the variable display of the normal identification information is not performed. (In this example, the minimum required time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to reach the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.6 seconds, and the time when the game ball flows down on the variable winning ball device 15 Is 0.5 seconds, the second KT shape Since the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds in the second KT state, when one game ball passes through the gate 32, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be opened. That is, it is difficult for the one game ball to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is). Thereby, it is possible to easily give a profit to the player in the second special state.

  In the present embodiment, the variable winning time is longer in the second KT state than in the first KT state by configuring the second KT state to have a longer normal symbol fluctuation time than the first KT state. The ball device 15 is controlled to be in the closed state, but the other control is to control the variable winning ball device 15 to be in the closed state for a longer period in the second KT state than in the first KT state. May be realized.

  For example, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed for a longer period in the second KT state than in the first KT state by configuring the second KT state to have a longer symbol determination time for the ordinary symbol than in the first KT state. Controlling to a state may be realized.

  In addition, for example, as shown in the present embodiment, the standby time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state in the second KT state in the case of a normal symbol hit is more than in the first KT state ( With the configuration in which the ordinary electric accessory is opened (as shown in FIG. 38) is longer, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state. May be.

  In addition, a combination of adjustment of a plurality of times among the above-described fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, the symbol fixing time of the ordinary symbol, and the standby time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the ordinary symbol is a hit is combined. In this case, the variable prize ball device 15 may be controlled to be in the closed state in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state.

  Further, according to this embodiment, in the normal state, the variable starting device is controlled to be in the disadvantageous state for a longer period than in the first special state (in this example, the microcomputer 560 for game control is configured as shown in FIG. As shown in (1), in the first KT state, the variable prize ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 0.5 second, and in the normal state, the variable prize ball device 15 is controlled for 3.8 seconds similarly to the second KT state. The variable start device is controlled so that the game medium that has passed through the special area is difficult to enter the variable start device when the variable identification information is not normally displayed (in this example, the game is performed). The minimum time required for the ball to pass through the gate 32 to reach the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.6 seconds, and the time for the game ball to flow down the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.5 seconds. Yes, variable winning ball in normal state When the variable winning prize ball device 15 is controlled to be opened when one game ball passes the gate 32 in the normal state, the one game is controlled. The ball is difficult to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being launched (right-handed) aiming at the special area in the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, the normal symbol has a longer variation time in the normal state than in the first KT state, so that the variable winning prize ball device is longer in the normal state than in the first KT state. Although the control of the variable winning ball device 15 to the closed state is realized by other control, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the closed state over a longer period in the normal state than in the first KT state by other control. You may.

  For example, by setting the symbol determination time of the normal symbol to be longer in the normal state than in the first KT state, the variable winning prize ball device 15 is closed for a longer period in the normal state than in the first KT state. Controlling may be realized.

  Further, for example, as shown in the present embodiment, in the normal state than in the first KT state, the waiting time until the variable winning prize ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit (FIG. 38, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the closed state over a longer period of time in the normal state than in the first KT state. Is also good.

  In addition, a combination of adjustment of a plurality of times among the above-described fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, the symbol fixing time of the ordinary symbol, and the standby time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the ordinary symbol is a hit is combined. In this case, the variable winning ball device 15 may be controlled to be closed for a longer period in the normal state than in the first KT state.

  In the present embodiment, the small hitting game state cannot be controlled based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the small hitting symbol. It is good also as a structure which can be controlled to a small hitting game state based on this. In this case, when the change of the second special symbol is started while the small hit change of the first special symbol is performed, the second special symbol may be forcibly removed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the change of the second special symbol is executed, a large hit or a small hit (except for a normal loss) is adopted except for a case of a forced loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the second special symbol fluctuates, a normal loss may be obtained. For example, when the small hitting ratio is reduced to ず れ, it is possible to make a mistake, and when the small hitting continues (the second small hitting variation without the large hitting variation or the missing variation after the first small hit variation). Is performed), a special effect that is not executed when the small hit is not continuous (when the next variation of the small hit is a big hit or a miss) (for example, an effect that notifies that the small hit is continuous) May be executed.

  Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the entry advantageous state (in this example, the open state) in which the game medium (in this example, the game ball) can enter, and the game medium inability or difficulty in entry Variable start device (in this example, variable winning ball device 15) that can be changed to a favorable entry disadvantage state (in this example, a closed state), and a variable entry start device that is provided downstream of the variable start device. (In this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) which can be changed to any one of a plurality of opening patterns to control the variable starting device (see FIG. 15). . Further, the variable display can be executed based on the game medium entering the variable starter, and based on the display result of the variable display being a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit symbol), a predetermined display is possible. It can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hitting game state) in which the variable device is changed to an entry advantageous state, and can be controlled to a special state (in this example, a KT state) in which the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is increased. It is. The special state is a first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and a second special state (high probability / second KT state in this example) having a different degree of advantage from the first special state. ) And can be controlled. The variable starting device can be controlled by the specific opening pattern at different rates depending on whether the control is performed in the first special state or the second special state (in the present example, in the first KT state). As shown in FIG. 15A, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. Open). Therefore, the monotonousness of the gaming property in the special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game when controlling to the special state can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the case where the variable winning ball device 15 is always opened for 5.5 seconds in the first KT state and the variable winning ball device 15 is always opened for 0.2 seconds in the second KT state is shown. It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened for 0.2 seconds with a low probability even in the first KT state, or the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened with a low probability even in the second KT state. It may be configured to open for 5 seconds. It is sufficient that the ratio of short-opening the variable winning ball device 15 is higher at least in the second KT state.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (in this example, 16R probable big hit, 6R probable big hit, 6R normal big hit, 2R positive big hit, 2R normal big hit), and the second special state Is higher than the first special state (in the present example, in the first KT state, it is rare that a game ball wins in the special winning opening 24 in the small hitting game, whereas the second KT state In the small win game, a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24). In addition, it is possible to control to the second special state in accordance with the type of the advantageous state (in this example, the state is shifted to the high probability / second KT state after the end of the big hit game based on the 16R probability change big hit). Therefore, by associating the type of the advantageous state with the type of the special state, it is possible to pay attention to which type of the advantageous state is obtained.

  In addition, you may comprise so that different effects may be performed during a big hit game according to the type of big hit. With such a configuration, attention can be paid to which effect is performed during the big hit game.

  Further, according to this embodiment, at least a part of the effect is taken over during the period controlled in the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) and the period controlled in the second special state. (In this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the big hit game based on the 16R probability change big hit, and the sound output of the music for the second KT is continued until the second KT state is ended.) ). Therefore, by giving the player a stronger impression of being controlled to the second special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, the case where the sound output of the music is taken over from the big hit game based on the 16R certain-variable big hit which triggers the second KT state over the subsequent second KT state is shown. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a moving image is taken over, a round number display is taken over, or a prize ball number display is taken over.

  Further, according to this embodiment, a specific variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 20) that is provided on the upstream side of the variable starting device and that can be changed between an advantageous approach state and an unfavorable approach state is provided. It can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a jackpot game state) in which the specific variable device is changed to an approach advantageous state. In addition, it is determined whether or not the variable starting device is controlled to be in an advantageous state of entry (in this example, whether or not the variable starting device is in a normal position), and the variable starting device is controlled to be in an advantageous state of entering at the same ratio regardless of the state. (In the present example, in the ordinary symbol process process (step S26C), it is determined whether the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state) or not, a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state. Regardless of whether it is in the big hit game state or not, it is determined whether or not to make a regular figure hit with the same probability). Therefore, the entry of the game medium into the specific variable device can be prevented from being affected by the variable starting device that can be controlled to be in the advantageous state even during the advantageous state, thereby shortening the digestion period of the advantageous state. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control to the special state (in this example, the probable change state) after controlling to the advantageous state, and to be the same as the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example). The variable starting device is controlled by selecting the open pattern by the ratio, and the variable display pattern is selected by the different ratio, and the variable display can be controlled to the third special state (in this example, low probability / first KT state). It is. Then, if the special state is not controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, the state can be controlled to the third special state (in the present example, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit, the low probability / first KT State). Therefore, in the case where the special state is not controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to provide an opportunity to deter the player from ending the game.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the variable starting device and the predetermined variable device are provided with the delay means (the restriction piece 118 in this example) for delaying the flow of the game medium. Therefore, the flow-down speed of the game medium is delayed by providing the delay means, so that the rate of entry of the game medium into the variable starting device can be further increased in the first special state, and the predetermined variable device can be increased in the second special state. The ratio of game media entering the game can be further increased.

  According to this embodiment, the variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) can be executed. At the same time, the variable display of the other of the first identification information and the second identification information can be performed during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information (in this example, the first special symbol is displayed). And the change display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel.) In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to control to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hitting game state), and it is possible to determine a variable display time (in this example, a fluctuating time). In the case of performing the display, it is possible to determine that the predetermined state is controlled at a higher rate than in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is only possible to determine a small hit if and only if). Then, when the display is controlled to the special state, a shorter time can be determined as the variable display time of the variable display of the second identification information as compared with the case where the display is controlled to the non-special state (in this example, As shown in FIG. 13 (C), in the non-KT state, the change time of the second special symbol is 15 minutes or 5 minutes, while as shown in FIGS. 13 (D) to 14 (I). In the KT state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1.5 seconds to 2 minutes 20 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to improve interest in the game in the gaming machine controlled to the special state.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not simultaneously executed. In this case, for example, the first special winning symbol 13 and the second special winning symbol 14 may be arranged in such a manner that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order of winning. You may be comprised so that the fluctuation | variation display of any special symbol (for example, 2nd special symbol) may be performed preferentially. In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed prior to the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is configured to include a case where the variable display is not performed. It is desirable that the gambling be not unnecessarily high.

  Further, according to this embodiment, a predetermined area (in this example, the operation gate 17) through which a game medium (in this example, a game ball) can pass is provided, and an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) is provided. It can be controlled. Then, after the specific display result (in this example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area. Therefore, when the player breaks the game after the end of the special state, it is possible to restrict the control to the advantageous state from progressing during the break of the player. In particular, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as long as 15 minutes or 5 minutes, so that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed immediately after the end of the low probability / first KT state. If the player enters a break because of the long-term fluctuation display, the big hit game will progress during the break even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit. It can be restricted, and a situation in which the profit of the player is lost can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the case where the operation gate 17 is provided separately from the gate 32 is shown, but the gate 32 and the operation gate 17 may be configured as a common gate.

  Further, it is not always necessary to provide the operation gate 17, and when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game may shift to the big hit game after the symbol confirmation display time elapses.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the advantageous state signals (in this example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) capable of specifying that the control is performed in the advantageous state can be externally output. In addition, when a specific display result (in this example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result, an advantageous state signal can be externally output. Therefore, it is possible to notify the gaming clerk that the unattended gaming machine without a player has entered an advantageous state, and to promote initialization of the gaming machine.

  Note that the external output of the advantageous state signal (in this example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) is not necessarily essential, and the advantageous state signal may not be externally output.

  Further, according to this embodiment, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result (in this example, a big hit symbol), the game medium is displayed in the first area (in this example, a special winning opening). (In this example, a game ball) can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) in which it can enter, and the display result of the variable display becomes a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit symbol). Based on this, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hitting game state) in which the game medium can enter the second area (in this example, the special winning opening 24). It can be controlled to a special state (in this example, KT state) in which the frequency of controlling to the predetermined state is increased, and as the special state, a first special state (in this example, high probability / first KT state) and the second special state It is possible to control to a second special state (in this example, high probability / second KT state) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. Then, a special signal (in this example, a special winning opening winning signal) can be externally output in response to the game medium entering the second area. Therefore, the state of entry of the game medium into the second area can be notified to the outside, and appropriate management of the gaming machine can be performed outside the gaming machine.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 32, when the big hit signal 1 is not output, the prize ball rate (the number of prize balls obtained per 100 shots of game balls, BA) is BA> 100. In, there is a possibility that an act of illegally obtaining a prize ball has been performed even though the big hit game is not being played, and the hall management computer can determine that there is an abnormality. However, even in such a case, if the big hit signal 2 is output and the special winning opening winning signal is output, a prize ball may be obtained in the small hit game during the KT state. , BA> 100, it is not determined to be abnormal, and appropriate management from outside the gaming machine can be performed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, a common special signal can be externally output when controlled to the first special state and when controlled to the second special state (in this example, FIG. 32 , A common special winning opening winning signal is externally output irrespective of the first KT state or the second KT state). Therefore, it is possible to simplify the external output processing on the gaming machine side.

  As in the modification shown in FIG. 33, as special signals, a first special signal (in this example, a special winning opening winning signal 1) and a second special signal (in this example, different from the first special signal) , A special winning port winning signal 2) can be externally output, the first special signal can be externally output when controlled to the first special state, and the first special signal can be output when controlled to the second special state. 2 It is possible to externally output the special signal (as shown in FIG. 33, the special winning opening winning signal 1 is externally output during the first KT state, and the special winning opening winning signal 2 is externally output during the second KT state). May be configured. With such a configuration, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately managed outside the gaming machine.

  For example, in the modification shown in FIG. 33, when the big hit signal 1 is not output and the big hit signal 2 is output, if the special winning opening winning signal 1 is output, the prize ball rate in the first KT state. (BA1), and if the special winning opening winning signal 2 is output, it may be calculated as the winning ball rate (BA2) in the second KT state. Then, in the second KT state, there is a case where an appropriate prize ball can be obtained in the small hitting game. Therefore, even if BA2> 100, it is determined that there is no abnormality. Is rarely obtained, and if BA1> 100, it may be determined that there is an abnormality. With such a configuration, appropriate management from outside the gaming machine can be performed.

  In addition, for example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, even though the jackpot signal 2 is not output (that is, not in the KT state), the special winning opening winning signal (the special winning opening winning signal 1) is not generated. Or a special winning opening winning signal 2) may be output, and the game shop clerk may be notified of the abnormality. Further, even when the output frequency of the special winning opening winning signal is abnormally high, it may be determined that the signal is abnormal and notified to a game clerk or the like.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the number of terminals provided on the external output terminal slope is limited (10 terminals in this example). Only a special winning opening winning signal indicating that the winning is detected can be output, and an external output signal is not particularly output when a winning in the special winning opening is detected. Even with such a configuration, an abnormal state of the gaming machine 1 can be detected to some extent by notifying the external device such as the hall management computer of even the winning state of the special winning opening 24.

  Note that the external output of the special signal (in this example, the special winning port winning signal) is not necessarily indispensable, and the special signal may not be externally output.

  Further, according to this embodiment, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit symbol), it is different from the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state). It can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hitting game state), and can be controlled to a special state (in this example, a KT state) in which the frequency of controlling to the predetermined state is increased. A special area (in this example, a special winning opening 24) into which a game medium (in this example, a game ball) can enter in a special state, and as a special state, a first special state (high probability / second in this example). 1KT state) and a second special state (in this example, high probability / second KT state) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. In addition, based on the game medium having entered the specific area in the second special state, an entry effect (in this example, display of a prize ball addition display, output of a prize sound, lighting display of the special prize mouth lamp 24a) can be executed. When the game medium enters the specific area in the first special state, the entry effect is not executed (in the present example, even if the game ball wins in the special winning opening 24 when the game is not in the second KT state, the prize ball is won). The display of the addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a are not executed). Therefore, the entry effect is not executed depending on the entry of the irregular game medium in the first special state (in this example, the special prize port 24 is rarely awarded in the first KT state). Of the game, the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state can be emphasized, and the interest in the game can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance when controlling to the special state.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state), and as the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (in this example, a 6R probability variable hit, 2R probability variable hit) and a It can be controlled to two advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variable jackpot). In addition, it is possible to control to the first special state after being controlled to the first advantageous state, and to control to the second special state after being controlled to the second advantageous state. After the big hit game based on the probable big hit, the game shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the big hit game based on the 16R probability big hit, and the game shifts to the high probability / second KT state after the big hit game based on the 16R certain big hit.) The special effect (in this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT) can be executed over the period controlled to the special state. Therefore, the effect in the second special state can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as an entry effect, an addition effect corresponding to the addition of the game value (in this example, display of prize ball addition display), and an effect by a sound output corresponding to the entry of the game medium. In this example, at least one of an effect (output of a winning sound) and an effect by light emission of the light emitter (in this example, lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a) is executed. Therefore, the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state can be emphasized, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Execution of the entry effect (in this example, the display of the prize ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a) and the special effect (in this example, the sound output of the second KT music). Is not indispensable, and it may be configured not to execute any one or both of these effects.

  In this embodiment, on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in a second manner in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. Although the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the background symbol are executed is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a variable design of a small symbol or a fourth symbol corresponding to a variable display of a first special symbol and a variable display of a small symbol or a fourth symbol corresponding to a variable display of a second special symbol are configured to be executable. Is also good. In this case, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be configured to be displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), or may be configured by a lamp or LED other than the effect display device 9. Is also good.

[Modification 1]
Hereinafter, a first modification of the above-described embodiment will be described. In the first modification, mainly, an example of a display screen (screen layout) displayed on the effect display device 9 in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and the KT state (especially low probability / first KT state) An example of display control of the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state will be described. Hereinafter, the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage may be referred to as a first hold display, and the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage may be referred to as a second hold display.

  Although the details will be clear in the following description, in the first modification, unlike the above-described embodiment, the effect display device 9 displays the background symbol (the first symbol shown in FIG. 63) in accordance with the change display of the special symbol. The background symbol display section 91a and the background symbol displayed on the second background symbol display section 92a are variably displayed, and the small symbols smaller than the background symbol (the first small symbol display section 91b and the second small symbol shown in FIG. 63). The small symbol displayed on the display unit 92b is variably displayed, and the first hold display (first hold display in the first hold display unit 61 shown in FIG. 63) or the second hold display ( A second hold display in the second hold display section 62 shown in FIG. 63 is displayed (that is, the first and second hold displays are not added and displayed as in the above-described embodiment), and the state is determined according to the game state. And the first specific display (the first specific display shown in FIG. 63). The first specific display on the fixed display section 61a) or the second specific display (the second specific display on the second specific display section 62a shown in FIG. 63) is displayed, and the hold number display corresponding to the first hold storage number (FIG. 63) (1) is displayed. Further, in the first modification, mainly different parts from the above-described embodiment will be described, and the other parts will be described as having the same configuration and processing as the above-described embodiment unless otherwise specified. Is omitted.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating the hold storage display control process (Step S707) in the first modification. In this hold storage display control process, display control of the first hold display, the second hold display, and the number-of-holds display corresponding to the first number of hold storage displayed on the effect display device 9 is performed.

  In the hold storage display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first effective start winning command has been received (step S7071). Whether or not the first effective start winning command has been received depends on, for example, whether or not a flag corresponding to the type of the received command (effect control command) is set in the process of step S670 shown in FIG. Recognizable.

  When the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command (Y in step S7071), the effect control CPU 201 updates the hold number display corresponding to the first hold storage number (step S7072). Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 adds 1 to the first reserved storage number when receiving the first valid start winning command, and subtracts 1 from the first reserved storage number when receiving the first variation pattern command. One reserved storage number is stored in, for example, a first reserved number storage buffer. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command, the effect control CPU 201 updates and displays the number-of-holds display (the first number-of-holds storage display 71) indicating the first number of hold storage added by one. Note that the effect control CPU 201 sets the number of the holdings indicating the first holding storage number obtained by subtracting 1 when the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the first holding storage is started (when the first variation pattern command is received). The display (first reserved storage number display 71) is updated and displayed.

  Thereafter, effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S7073). If it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S7073), the process ends, and if it is in the non-KT state. In (Y in step S7073), a suspension notice determination process is executed (S7074). Whether or not the state is the non-KT state (or the KT state) can be recognized by, for example, the type of the background image currently displayed by the processing of steps S631, S634, S638, and S642 shown in FIG.

  In the suspension notice determination process of step S7074, the display mode of the first suspension display is any of a plurality of special modes (for example, “blue”, “green”, and “red”) different from the normal mode (for example, “white”). In this case, it is determined whether the suspension notice is to be made, and if so, which special mode and how to make the change (that is, the content of the change). Specifically, when the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command from the game control microcomputer 560, it also receives the first winning time determination result command. More specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the big hit determination random number (random 1), which is extracted and stored in the first hold storage buffer in the first start port switch passing process based on the effective start winning, and the big hit. Based on the type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5), a big hit determination or a variation pattern determination is performed, and a command indicating the determination result is a first winning determination result. Send a command. Therefore, effect control CPU 201 determines the suspension notice based on the first winning determination result command received together with the first effective start winning command. For example, when the variation pattern indicated by the first prize-time determination result command is a variation pattern of a big hit, the effect control CPU 201 at a high rate indicates a special mode (for example, “red”) that indicates that the big hit expectation is high. Decide to change. Further, for example, when the variation pattern indicated by the first prize-winning determination result command is a variation pattern of a loss, the effect control CPU 201 determines not to change to the special mode at a high rate (keep the normal mode). . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect control CPU 201 determines that the fluctuation pattern indicated by the first prize time determination result command has a high expectation of a big hit (that is, it is easy to select when the big hit is detected, and when the losing is selected). If it is a variation pattern that is difficult to perform, it is determined to change to a special mode (for example, “red”) indicating that the big hit expectation is high at a high rate, and the variation pattern indicated by the first prize time determination result command is determined. Is low in the jackpot expectation (that is, a variation pattern that is difficult to be selected at the time of a big hit and is easily selected at the time of a big hit), a high ratio is determined as a normal mode that does not indicate the big hit expectation. Is also good. Also, the display mode of the first hold display is not changed to the special mode at the time of the start winning (that is, at the time of receiving the first valid start win command), but is displayed at another timing (for example, the first hold display is shifted). At a predetermined timing or at a predetermined timing during the change display of the special symbol). Also, in the suspension notice determination processing, a first specification display (first specification) to be described later, which is displayed when the first reservation display is deleted and the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first reservation display is started. The display mode up to the display mode of the first specific display on the display unit 61a may be determined in advance.

  After that, the effect control CPU 201 increments the first hold display in the first hold display section 61 by 1 in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S7074 (step S7075).

  On the other hand, when the first effective start winning command has not been received (N in step S7071), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second effective start winning command has been received (step S7076). When the effect control CPU 201 receives the second effective start winning command (Y in step S7076), it determines whether or not it is in the KT state (step S7077), and has received the second effective start winning command. If not (N in step S7076), the flow shifts to step S7083.

  If the effect is not in the KT state (N in step S7077), the effect control CPU 201 ends the process. It is determined whether or not it is (step S7078). Here, the chance time is a low probability / first KT controlled until the special symbol is changed 100 times (ie, up to 100 revolutions after the end of the big hit game) after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. Refers to the state. The remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the chance time is, for example, the fluctuation after the effect control CPU 201 first receives the low-precision / first KT background designation command by the processing of step S633 shown in FIG. 44 after the end of the big hit game. Recognition is possible by storing the number of times and subtracting it from the specified number of chance times (100 times).

  If it is not less than the remaining 9 fluctuations until the end of the chance time (N in step S7078), the effect control CPU 201 executes a reservation notice determination process (step S7079). Note that the suspension notice determination processing in step S7079 is the same as the suspension notice determination processing described in the processing in step S7074, and can be described by replacing “first” in the suspension notice determination processing in step S7074 with “second”. . After that, the effect control CPU 201 increments the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 by one in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S7079 (step S7080).

  If the remaining change is 9 or less before the end of the chance time (Y in step S7078), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether the remaining change is 5 or less until the end of the chance time (step S7081). If the remaining change is equal to or less than the remaining 5 fluctuations until the end of the chance time (Y in step S7081), the effect control CPU 201 ends the processing. At this time, when there is a second hold display already displayed, the effect control CPU 201 may control all the second hold displays to be non-display. If the remaining time is not less than or equal to the remaining 5 fluctuations until the chance time ends (that is, if the remaining 9 fluctuations to 6 fluctuations; N in step S7081), the effect control CPU 201 returns to the second holding display section 62 in the normal mode. The display is increased by 1 (step S7082).

  When neither the first effective start winning command nor the second starting winning command has been received, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined state change has occurred (step S7083). Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 changes the state from the big hit gaming state to the KT state as a predetermined state change based on the background designation command and the big hit start designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560, or It is determined whether there has been a change from the KT state to the non-KT state. If there is no predetermined state change (N in step S7083), effect control CPU 201 ends the processing, and if there is a predetermined state change (Y in step S7083), The displayed first hold display or second hold display is hidden (step S7084). Specifically, when the gaming state changes from the big hit gaming state to the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 hides the first hold display, and changes the gaming state from the KT state (exactly, the first KT state) to the non-KT state. When the state is changed, the second hold display is hidden. If the game control state has the second hold storage when the game state changes from the big hit game state to the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 displays the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory. If the game state changes from the KT state (accurately, the first KT state) to the non-KT state and has the first hold storage, the first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage is displayed. I do.

  Here, characteristic points in the above-described hold storage display control processing will be described below.

  When the first valid start prize command is received (Y in step S7071), the update of the display of the number of holdings (step S7072) is executed, whereas when the second valid start prize command is received (step S7076). In Y), the update of the number-of-suspended display is not executed. From this, it can be seen that the number of reservations corresponding to the first number of reserved storages is updated and displayed, whereas the number of reservations corresponding to the second number of reserved storages is not displayed. In addition, while the hold number corresponding to the first hold storage number is updated and displayed irrespective of the gaming state (in the KT state or the non-KT state), the hold number corresponding to the second hold storage number is displayed. Is not displayed regardless of the game state.

  Further, when the first valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7071), the first hold display is not increased (step S7075 is not executed) unless the state is the non-KT state (N in step S7073). ), When the second valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7076), the second hold display is not incremented unless it is in the KT state (N in step S7077) (the processing of steps S7080 and S7082 is not executed). . Further, when the state shifts to the KT state after the big hit, the first hold display is hidden, and when the state shifts from the KT state to the non-KT state, the second hold display is hidden (steps S7083 and S7084). For this reason, the first hold display is not displayed in the KT state but is displayed in the non-KT state (normal state), and the second hold display is not displayed in the non-KT state but is displayed in the KT state. You can see that

  Also, when the second valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7076), if the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time becomes 9 or less, the suspension notice is not executed (Y in step S7078 does not execute S7079). . If the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 or less, the second hold display is not increased (Y in step S7081 does not execute S7082). For this reason, in the second hold display, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time becomes 9 to 6 times, execution of the hold notice is restricted (displayed in a normal mode), and the number of remaining times until the end of the chance time becomes 5 When the number of times is less than or equal to the number of times, execution of the suspension notice is restricted, and addition of the second suspension display is restricted (is not displayed) even in the KT state. As described above, different display controls are performed on the second hold display depending on the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time even in the same game state. The reason for this will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the background symbol change start process (step S901) in the first modification. In the background symbol change start process, the same processes as those described with reference to FIG. 51 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the background symbol change start process, effect control CPU 201 executes a specific display control process (step S920A). Here, the specific display control processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating the specific display control process (Step S920A) in the first modification. In this specific display control process, the first specific display (the first specific display in the first specific display section 61a shown in FIG. 63) and the second specific display (the second specific display shown in FIG. 63) displayed on the effect display device 9 The second specific display in the section 62a) and the display control of the shielding effect are performed. Here, the first specific display is different from the first hold display unit 61 during the period from the start of the variable display to the end thereof, corresponding to the variable display during the variable display of the first special symbol. 1 is a display for specifying the execution of the variable display, which is displayed on the specific display unit 61a. In addition, the second specific display is different from the second reserved display unit 62 during the period from the start of the variable display to the end thereof, corresponding to the variable display during the variable display of the second special symbol. This is displayed on the specific display unit 62a, and is a display for specifying execution of the variable display. Further, the first specific display (or the second specific display) has the same shape and size as the first reserved display (or the second reserved display) displayed on the first reserved display unit 61 (or the second reserved display unit 62). It is displayed by However, the first specific display and the first reserved display (or the second specific display and the second reserved display) may have different shapes or different sizes, and may be displayed in completely different modes. You may. For example, it is desirable that the first specific display and the first reserved display (or the second specific display and the second reserved display) be displayed in such a manner that some of the shapes and colors are similar. Further, the shielding effect refers to an effect in which the second hold display and the second specific display are shielded so as to be hardly visible.

  In the specific display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern (that is, the variation pattern command for the first special symbol) (step S9301). If it is the first variation pattern (Y in step S9301), effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S9302), and if it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S9302). In step S9303, the process is terminated, and when the state is the non-KT state (Y in step S9302), a specific notice determination process is executed (S9303). Whether or not the state is the non-KT state (or the KT state) can be recognized by, for example, the type of the background image currently displayed by the processing of steps S631, S634, S638, and S642 shown in FIG.

  In the specific notice determination process of step S9303, the display mode of the first specific display is any of a plurality of special modes (for example, “blue”, “green”, and “red”) different from the normal mode (for example, “white”). In this case, it is determined whether a specific notice is to be made, and if so, which special mode and how to make the change (that is, the content of the change). Specifically, effect control CPU 201 determines a specific notice based on the received first variation pattern command. For example, when the first variation pattern is a jackpot variation pattern, the effect control CPU 201 determines to change to a special mode (for example, “red”) indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is high at a high rate. . Further, for example, when the first variation pattern is an outlier variation pattern, the effect control CPU 201 determines not to change to the special mode (keep the normal mode) at a high rate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect control CPU 201 has a first variation pattern with a high degree of expectation of a big hit (that is, a variation pattern that is easily selected at the time of a big hit and hard to be selected at the time of a loss). Sometimes, at a high rate, it is determined to change to a special mode (for example, “red”) that indicates that the big hit expectation is high, and the first fluctuation pattern is one with a low big hit expectation (that is, (A variation pattern that is difficult to be selected at the outset, and is easily selected at the time of a loss), it may be determined at a high ratio to a normal mode that does not indicate the jackpot expectation degree. Also, the display mode of the first specific display is not changed to the special mode at the start of the change (that is, at the time of receiving the first change pattern command), but at another timing (for example, a predetermined timing during the change display of the special symbol). ) May be determined to be changed. In addition, in the above-described hold notice determination processing (step S7074), when the display mode of the first specific display is determined in advance at the time of the start winning (that is, based on the look-ahead), the second predetermined display determined based on the look-ahead is performed. The display mode of the first specific display in the specific notice determination process may be determined based on the display mode of the one specific display. Specifically, for example, when the display mode of the first specific display is determined to be “green” based on the look-ahead, a special mode (for example, indicating that the big hit expectation is higher than “green”) While it is possible to determine “red”, it is prohibited to determine a mode (for example, “green”) that indicates that the big hit expectation is lower than “green” (that is, the fall of the big hit expectation is prohibited). Do). In addition, for example, when the display mode of the first specific display is determined based on the prefetch, the first specific display mode is displayed in the display mode determined based on the prefetch, and the specific notice determination process is performed. The display mode may not be determined.

  After that, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the first specific display on the first specific display unit 61a in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S9303 (step S9304).

  On the other hand, when it is not the first variation pattern (that is, when it is the variation pattern command for the second special symbol; N in step S9301), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the KT state is set ( In step S9305), if the state is not the KT state (N in step S9305), the processing is terminated. Is determined (step S9306).

  If the remaining time is not less than or equal to the remaining 9 fluctuations until the end of the chance time (N in step S9306), the effect control CPU 201 executes a specific notice determination process (step S9307). Note that the specific notice determination processing in step S9307 is the same as the specific notice determination processing described in step S9303, and can be described by reading “first” in the specific notice determination processing in step S9303 as “second”. . After that, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the second specific display on the second specific display unit 62a in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S9307 (step S9308).

  If the remaining 9 fluctuations are not more than the change until the end of the chance time (Y in step S9306), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether the remaining change is 5 or less until the end of the chance time (step S9309). If the remaining time is not less than or equal to the remaining 5 fluctuations until the end of the chance time (that is, if the remaining 9 fluctuations to 6 fluctuations; N in step S9309), the effect control CPU 201 performs the second specification in the second specification display unit 62a in the normal mode. The display is set (step S9310).

  If the remaining change is 5 or less before the end of the chance time (Y in step S9309), the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the shield effect (step S9311). Here, the shielding effect is an effect that makes the visibility of the second hold display and the second specific display difficult, and for example, the transparency of a screen displayed on a layer in front of the second hold display and the second specific display Is gradually reduced in accordance with the decrease in the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the second hold display or the second specific display. In addition, the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a, the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b, and the first reserved storage number display 71 are displayed in a layer in front of the blackout effect, and the like. What is necessary is just to make it visually recognizable even if a blackout effect is performed.

  Although not described in the specific display control process described above, during the chance time, the display setting of the remaining number display 81 (see FIG. 63) indicating the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is performed. Specifically, when the game is controlled to the low probability / first KT state after the end of the big hit game (that is, the game enters the chance time), the initial number (low probability / control to the first KT state) is set as the number indicated by the remaining number display 81. 100 times) is displayed and set, and the number of times decremented by 1 is set every time the special symbol change display is started, so that the remaining times display 81 is controlled to the low probability / first KT state. Indicates the remaining number (of chance time).

  Here, characteristic points in the above-described specific display control processing will be described below.

  When the first variation pattern is received (Y in step S9301), if the state is not the non-KT state (N in step S9302), the display of the first specific display is not set (the processing of step S9304 is not executed), and When the second variation pattern is received (N in step S9301), the display of the second specific display is not set (N in steps S9305 and S9310 are not executed) unless the state is the KT state (N in step S9305). For this reason, the first specific display is not displayed in the KT state but is displayed in the non-KT state (normal state), and the second specific display is not displayed in the non-KT state but is displayed in the KT state. You can see that

  Further, when the second variation pattern is received (N in step S9301), the specific notice is not executed if the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 or less (S9307 is not executed due to Y in step S9306). If the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 or less, the second specific display is not set to be displayed (S9310 is not executed due to Y in step S9309). Accordingly, in the second specific display, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time becomes 9 to 6 times, execution of the specific notice is limited (displayed in a normal mode), and the number of remaining times until the end of the chance time is 5 When the number of times is less than or equal to the number, the execution of the specific notice is restricted, and the display of the second specific display is restricted (is not displayed) even in the KT state. As described above, different display controls are performed according to the remaining number of chance times even in the same game state for the second specific display. The reason for this will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The description returns to FIG. 61. In the background symbol change start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the received change pattern command is the first change pattern (step S920B). If it is the first variation pattern (Y in step S920B), effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S920C), and if it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S920C). , The first non-display effect is set as the background symbol change pattern (step S920F). On the other hand, when it is in the non-KT state (Y in step S920C), the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol and the small symbol (step S920D), and selects one of the first variable effects as the background symbol pattern. Is set (step S920E). Here, the background symbol variation pattern is set according to the variation pattern, and the variation pattern of the background symbol or the small symbol (for example, the reach symbol is temporarily stopped during the variation, or the pseudo symbol symbol indicating the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped). This is an effect pattern that defines a variation mode such as causing the user to make a change. The first fluctuation effect is set in accordance with the first fluctuation pattern, and is a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the background symbol in the first background symbol display section 91a and the small symbol in the first small symbol display section 91b. The first non-display effect is set in accordance with the first variation pattern, and is an (non-display) effect pattern in which the background symbol in the first background symbol display portion 91a and the small symbol in the first small symbol display portion 91b are not variably displayed. is there.

  On the other hand, if it is not the first variation pattern (that is, if it is the variation pattern command for the second special symbol; N in step S920B), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the KT state is set ( If it is not in the KT state (N in step S920G), the second non-display effect is set as the background symbol change pattern (step S920J). On the other hand, if it is in the KT state (Y in step S920G), the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol and the small symbol (step S920H), and selects one of the second variable effects as the background symbol pattern. It is set (step S920I). Here, the second variation effect is set according to the second variation pattern, and a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the variation pattern of the background symbol in the second background symbol display portion 92a and the small symbol in the second small symbol display portion 92b. The second non-display effect is set according to the second variation pattern, and the background symbol in the second background symbol display section 92a and the small symbol in the second small symbol display section 92b are not variably displayed (not displayed). This is a production pattern.

  After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines the set background symbol variation pattern (see steps S920E, S920F, S920I, and 920J), the set specific display (see steps S9304, S9308, and S9310), and the set shield effect (see FIGS. A process table corresponding to the step S9311) is selected (step S920K). Accordingly, in the subsequent processing, various effects having the set contents are output from the effect devices (the effect display device 9, the various lamps, and the speakers 27) along with the change display of the special symbol.

  Here, in the above-described background symbol change start processing, characteristic points will be described below.

  When the first variation pattern is received (Y in step S920B), if the state is not the non-KT state (N in step S920C), the first non-display effect is set as the background symbol variation pattern, so that the first background symbol is set. No background symbol is displayed on the display unit 91a, and no small symbol is displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b (step S920F). On the other hand, when the second variation pattern is received (N in step S920B), the second non-display effect is set as the background symbol variation pattern if it is not in the KT state (N in step S920G). No background symbol is displayed on the symbol display section 92a, and no small symbol is displayed on the second small symbol display section 92b (step S920F). From this, in the non-KT state (normal state), when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the background symbol and the small symbol are variably displayed according to the variable display, but the variable display of the second special symbol is changed. Even if it is performed, it is understood that the background symbol and the small symbol are not displayed according to the variable display. Further, in the KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the background symbol and the small symbol are variably displayed according to the variable display, but even if the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variance is displayed. It can be seen that the background symbol and the small symbol are not displayed according to the display.

  Also, the background symbol and the small symbol are not variably displayed in correspondence with the variable display of separate special symbols, respectively (for example, the background symbol corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the small symbol is the second symbol). (2) It is not something that is separately displayed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol.) For this reason, the background symbol and the small symbol are changed and displayed in synchronization with each other, and an effect without a sense of incongruity is realized, and the target of the variable display of the small symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is changed according to the game state. It is understood that it is specified.

[Screen layout]
Next, a screen layout (display screen) in the effect display device 9 displayed by the processing shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63A shows an example of a screen layout in a normal state (low probability / non-KT state), and FIG. 63B shows an example of a screen layout in chance time (low probability / first KT state).

  As shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has the first hold display portion 61 at the lower left of the display screen. The hold display is displayed. Specifically, in the first hold display section 61, the first hold displays of the number corresponding to the maximum storage number of the first hold storage number (here, 4) are arranged on the left and right. Also, the first specific display is displayed on the first specific display section 61a provided at the lower center of the display screen and adjacent to the right of the first hold display section 61. Then, when the change display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the hold display corresponding to the change display to be started among the first hold displays displayed on the first hold display unit 61 (one display). One of the rightmost reserved displays is deleted and shifted (moved) to the first specific display unit 61a to be displayed as the first specific display, and the remaining first reserved displays are shifted rightward one by one ( Moved). Note that the first hold display unit 61 and the first specific display unit 61a may be arranged at any position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the first hold display and the first specific display may be shifted. Instead, the display may be deleted once and then redisplayed at another position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state, the effect display device 9 (the liquid crystal display device) displays the number of holds corresponding to the first hold storage number at the left center portion of the display screen. A one-hold storage number display 71 is displayed. In addition, as a mode of the first reserved storage number display, the number itself indicating the first reserved storage number may be used, or a number of display lamps corresponding to the first reserved storage number may be lit and displayed. Is also good.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has a first background symbol display portion 91a at the center of the display screen, and the first special symbol variation. The background symbol corresponding to the display is variably displayed, and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first small symbol display section 91b at the upper right of the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (2), in the chance time (low probability / first KT state), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the second hold display portion 62 at the lower left of the display screen. The hold display is displayed. Specifically, in the second hold display section 62, the number of second hold displays corresponding to the maximum storage number (here, 4) of the second hold storage number is arranged on the left and right. In addition, the second specific display is displayed on the second specific display part 62a provided at the lower center of the display screen and adjacent to the right of the second reservation display part 62. When the change display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold storage is started, the hold display corresponding to the change display to be started among the second hold displays displayed on the second hold display unit 62 (one One of the right-side reserved displays is deleted and shifted (moved) to the second specific display unit 62a to be displayed as the second specific display, and the remaining second reserved displays are shifted rightward one by one ( Moved). In addition, the 2nd hold | maintenance display part 62 and the 2nd specific display part 62a may be arrange | positioned in any position of the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the 2nd hold | maintenance display and the 2nd specific display are shifted. Instead, the display may be deleted once and then redisplayed at another position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), even in the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the number of held items corresponding to the first number of held items in the left center portion of the display screen. A one-hold storage number display 71 is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the number of holds corresponding to the second number of storages is not displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), at the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the second special symbol change in the second background symbol display portion 92a at the center of the display screen. The background symbol corresponding to the display is variably displayed, and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second small symbol display portion 92b at the upper right of the display screen.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), in the chance time, a remaining number display 81 indicating the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is displayed on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) in the lower right corner of the display screen. Then, a display indicating that the player is currently in the chance time is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen (for example, a character display such as “during the chance time”). A right-handed display for instructing the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed) aimed at the right side of the game area 7 is performed.

  Here, although not shown, the screen layout in the high probability / first KT state and the high probability / second KT state will be briefly described. In the high probability / first KT state, a screen layout similar to that in the low probability / first KT state shown in FIG. 63 (2) is displayed, but the remaining number display 81 is not displayed, The difference is that a display indicating a high probability / first KT state (for example, a character display such as “Normal rushing”) is performed. In the high probability / second KT state, the same screen layout as in the low probability / first KT state shown in FIG. 63 (2) is displayed, but the remaining number display 81 is not displayed, and The difference is that a display indicating a high probability / second KT state (for example, a character display such as “during special rush”) is performed.

  As described above, in the normal state, the effect display device 9 can display the first hold display and the first specific display, and the background symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. And the small symbol are displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, in the normal state, the effect display device 9 does not display the second hold display or the second specific display. Even if the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the background corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. No symbols or small symbols are displayed. Also, during the chance time (or the KT state), the effect display device 9 can display the second hold display and the second specific display, which corresponds to the change display of the second special symbol. The background symbol and the small symbol are variably displayed. On the other hand, during the chance time (or KT state), the effect display device 9 does not display the first hold display or the first specific display, and even if the first special symbol fluctuates, the first special symbol is displayed. No background symbol or small symbol corresponding to the variable display is displayed. As described above, in the normal state, the fluctuation display of the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not performed, and the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed. Is very long (for example, 5 minutes or 15 minutes), even if the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, it is possible to reduce the degree of recognition of the variable display of the second special symbol by the player. The effect control can be performed. Further, in the KT state such as during the chance time, the frequency of occurrence of small hits per unit time is increased as a result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a shorter fluctuation time than in the normal state. Attention is paid to the change display of the second special symbol which triggers a hit. For this reason, in the KT state, even if the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the variation display of the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is not performed, and the first hold display and the variation display are not performed. By not performing the first specific display, the degree of recognition of the variable display of the first special symbol is reduced, and the variable display of the second special symbol can be noticed more.

  As can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and (2), in the normal state, the small symbols are variably displayed on the first small symbol display section 91b in accordance with the variably displayed first special symbols, and during the chance time ( In the KT state), the small symbols are variably displayed on the second small symbol display section 92b in accordance with the variable display of the second special symbols. Therefore, the background symbol in the first background symbol display section 91a in the normal state and the variation display of the background symbol in the second background symbol display section 92a during the chance time (or the KT state) are displayed in a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect, etc.). ), The player can recognize the appropriate special symbol variation display according to the game state by checking the small symbol.

  As can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and (2), the display indicating the number of the second reserved storages is not displayed regardless of the gaming state. This is for the following reason. That is, although the second hold display is not displayed in the normal state, if the display indicating the number of the second hold storages is performed, there is a possibility that the effects may be inconsistent. In addition, during the chance time, if the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time becomes five or less, the display of the second hold display is limited (the display is controlled to be shielded by the shield effect or to be hidden). ). For this reason, for example, even if the display of the second hold display is restricted during the chance time, if the number of the second hold memories is displayed, there is a possibility that the effect may become inconsistent. Therefore, during the chance time, by not displaying the number of the second hold storage from the beginning, the number of remaining times until the end of the chance time becomes five or less, and the display of the second hold display is restricted. I try to realize a directing without any discomfort. For the above reason, the display indicating the number of the second hold storages is not performed regardless of the gaming state. However, for example, a KT state different from the chance time (a state in which the KT state is guaranteed until the next big hit) Then, since the second hold display is not limited, the number of second hold storages may be displayed.

  As can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and (2), the first reserved storage number display 71 indicating the number of first reserved storages is displayed regardless of the gaming state. This is for the following reason. In other words, in the non-KT state (normal state), the display of the first hold display is not limited, and in the normal state, the first hold storage number display 71 is displayed to ensure the player's recognizability. I have. In addition, even in the KT state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is not long (for example, 10 seconds or less). , The right-handed operation is performed, so that the first reserved storage rarely occurs. For this reason, even if the first reserved storage number display 71 is displayed in the KT state, the number is almost “0” in most cases, and the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable. Further, rather, by letting the player recognize that the first reserved storage number display 71 indicates “0”, it is possible to recognize that the game is a right-handed game (that is, a game in which the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is possible to concentrate on right-handed games. For the above-mentioned reason, the display of the first reserved storage number display 71 is performed regardless of the gaming state, but may be hidden in the KT state.

  In the normal state, the fourth symbol is variably displayed in correspondence with the second special symbol variably displayed. In the KT state such as during a chance time, the fourth symbol is variably displayed. Thus, the fourth symbol may be variably displayed. Here, the variable display of the fourth symbol is a predetermined display in a partial area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and smaller than the first small symbol display section 91b and the second small symbol display section 92b. This is realized by continuing a state in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated at regular time intervals in a color (for example, blue). Note that the area in which the fourth symbol is variably displayed (fourth symbol display area) may be an area different from the display screen of the effect display device 9. Four symbol display areas may be realized. In this manner, by performing the variable display of the fourth symbol, the background symbol or the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is not displayed in the normal state, or the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the KT state. Even when the corresponding background symbol or small symbol is not displayed, the variation state of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be confirmed by the fourth symbol. In addition, the visibility of the fourth symbol is lower than that of the background symbol and the small symbol, so that in the normal state, the degree of recognition of the variable display of the second special symbol can be reduced for the player. In the state, the degree of recognition of the variable display of the first special symbol for the player can be reduced.

  Further, a hold display lamp (not shown) corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display may be provided outside the frame of the effect display device 9, and the hold display lamp may be lit regardless of the game state. . It should be noted that the display control of the hold display lamp may be controlled by the game control microcomputer 560 or may be controlled by the effect control microcomputer 200. Alternatively, a hold display lamp that is controlled by each of them may be separately provided. By separately providing the hold display lamp in this manner, even when the second hold display is not displayed in the normal state or when the first hold display is not displayed in the KT state, the first hold storage number or the second hold You can check the number of storage. In addition, since the hold display lamp is provided outside the frame of the effect display device 9, the visibility is lower than the hold display in the first hold display unit 61 and the second hold display unit 62. On the other hand, the degree of recognition of the second hold display can be reduced, and in the KT state, the degree of recognition of the first hold display can be reduced for the player.

  In the first modification, the first hold display or the second hold display is displayed according to the game state, and the first specific display or the second specific display is displayed according to the game state. It is assumed that the display positions of the hold display unit 61 and the second hold display unit 62 are the same (lower left of the display screen), and the display positions of the first specific display unit 61a and the second specific display unit 62a are the same (center of the display screen). Lower part), but these may be different from each other. Similarly, in the above description, the display positions of the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a are the same (the center of the display screen), and the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit Although the display position of 92b is the same (upper right part of the display screen), these may be different positions. Further, for example, even if the display positions of the first background symbol display section 91a and the second background symbol display section 92a (or the first small symbol display section 91b and the second small symbol display section 92b) are the same, they are displayed respectively. By changing the display mode of the background symbol (or small symbol) to be displayed, it is possible to distinguish between the one corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the one corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Is also good. Also, for example, when the display positions of the first small symbol display section 91b and the second small symbol display section 92b are set to different positions (particularly, positions that do not overlap each other), it is possible to display the small symbols at the respective display positions. Becomes In this case, in the normal state, the small symbols may be variably displayed on the second small symbol display section 92b according to the variably displayed second special symbols. However, in this case, it is preferable that the small symbols in the second small symbol display section 92b have lower visibility than the small symbols in the first small symbol display section 91b. Similarly, in the KT state such as during the chance time, the small symbols may be variably displayed on the first small symbol display section 91b according to the variably displayed first special symbols. However, in this case, it is preferable that the small symbols in the first small symbol display section 91b have lower visibility than the small symbols in the second small symbol display section 92b.

[Example of display control such as second hold display during chance time]
Next, an example of the display control of the second hold display and the second specific display during the chance time displayed by the processing of the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 64 (1) shows an example of a display effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 10 or more during the chance time. As shown in FIG. 64 (1), at this time, the second hold display is displayed on the second hold display section 62 and the second specific display is displayed on the second specific display section 62a. In addition, since the suspension notice and the specific notice can be executed, the second suspension display can be changed to the special mode, and the specific display can also be changed to the special mode. During the chance time, a right-handed display is performed so that the player makes a right-handed.

  FIG. 64 (2) shows an example of a display effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 to 6 times during the chance time. As shown in FIG. 64 (2), at this time, the second hold display is displayed on the second hold display section 62 and the second specific display is displayed on the second specific display section 62a. However, since the execution of the suspension notice and the specific notice is prohibited, the second suspension display is displayed in the normal mode, and the second specific display is also displayed in the normal mode.

  FIG. 64 (3) shows an example of a display effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the number of remaining times until the end of the chance time during the chance time is 5 or less. As shown in FIG. 64 (3), at this time, a shielding effect (blackout effect) is performed in which the display areas of the second hold display unit 62 and the second specific display unit 62a are shielded so as to be difficult to see. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the second reserved display on the second reserved display unit 62 and makes it difficult to visually recognize the second specific display on the second specific display unit 62a. In this blackout effect, blackout is gradually performed (transmittance decreases) as the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time decreases. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the second hold display and the second specific display, and it is possible to impressively suggest that the number of remaining times until the end of the chance time has decreased.

  Incidentally, as can be seen from the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 or less, the additional display of the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be non-display. Therefore, even if the shielding effect (blackout effect) is not executed, the additional display of the second hold display on the second hold display unit 62 is made difficult to visually recognize (not display), and the second display on the second specific display unit 62a is not displayed. The specific display can be made difficult to view (not display). Further, when the shielding effect (blackout effect) is executed, the additional display of the second hold display and the second specific display are not controlled to be non-display, and are controlled to be displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 64 (2). Is also good. Even in this case, the second hold display and the second specific display are shielded by the blackout effect displayed on the upper layer, so that the second hold display and the second specific display are difficult to visually recognize, The flow of the display control of the second hold display and the second specific display can be simplified.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (3), since the display of the second hold display and the second specific display is restricted so as to be difficult to see by the shield effect, the effect of shifting the second hold display (second hold display). Is also shifted to the right sequentially, and the second hold display is shifted to the second specific display). Even if the shielding effect is not executed, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 or less, if there is a second hold display already displayed, all the second hold displays are turned off. The display may be controlled, and the effect in which the second hold display is shifted and displayed may be limited to non-display.

  Further, in the above description, the shield effect (blackout effect) that shields the entire screen causes the second hold display or the second specific display to be shielded, thereby making it difficult to view (or not display). By changing the layout of the display screen, the second hold display or the second specific display may be made difficult to view (or not display). Here, “changing the layout of the display screen” is a concept including changing the display position and the display size of various display items displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. This is a concept that includes all displays, such as background symbols and hold displays, that are displayed as effects on the effect display device 9. As the change of the layout of the display screen, for example, the display area of the remaining number display 81 may be expanded. Specifically, by expanding the display area of the remaining number display 81 to the left, the second hold display section 62 on which the second hold display is displayed and the second specific display section 62a on which the second specific display is displayed May be shielded. Further, as the change of the layout of the display screen, for example, the second hold display and the second specific display may be shielded by expanding the second background symbol display section 92a downward. In addition, the shielding effect is not limited to the blackout effect, and may be an effect of shielding the second hold display and the second specific display by using another display effect or a movable body (movable attraction). . Further, the second hold display and the second specific display may not be completely shielded, and may be difficult to visually recognize due to reduced visibility. For example, in the effect display device 9, the display position of the second hold display and the second specific display is changed (for example, changed to the upper right corner), or the display size is changed (for example, reduced display) to be visually recognized. The property may be reduced.

  In addition, the above-described blackout effect is started on condition that the number of remaining times until the end of the chance time is 5 or less, and the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled so as to be difficult to visually recognize. However, the blackout effect is started on the condition that the number of remaining times until the end of the chance time is, for example, 10 or less, and as the number of remaining times decreases, the transparency decreases, and the number of remaining times becomes 10 or more. In the case of six times, the second hold display or the second specific display may be visually recognizable, but when the remaining number of times reaches five, the second hold display or the second specific display may be difficult to visually recognize. By doing so, it is possible to make the display control in which the second hold display and the second specific display are difficult to visually recognize less uncomfortable. Further, the same effect can be applied to a case where an effect other than the blackout effect is used as the shield effect.

  FIG. 64 (4) shows an example of the display effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the change display of the final change of the chance time (100th rotation after the start of the chance time) is completed. As shown in FIG. 64 (4), when the final change of the chance time is completed, the background symbol (for example, a stop symbol indicating a loss (or a small hit)) corresponding to the result of the variation display of the second special symbol (for example, a stop symbol). “3”, “9”, and “4”) stop, and similarly, small symbols (for example, “3”, “9”, and “4”) corresponding to the result of the variable display of the second special symbol stop. The background symbol and the small symbol may be different symbols. Then, with the end of the chance time, the right-handed display ends (is not displayed), and instead, a left-handed notification that prompts the player to make a left-handed sound is executed. Although not shown, during the change of the final change, an end display (for example, a character display of “CHANCE TIME END!”) Indicating that the chance time is ended is displayed, and the first time is displayed. Based on the value of the prize ball counter, a display of the number of prize balls during consecutive play is displayed. As a result, the end of the extended play and the total number of prize balls acquired during the period (total number of prize balls acquired) are notified. At this time, the number of big hits (the number of extended holidays) in a series of periods from the initial hit to the end of the chance time may be reported together.

  FIG. 64 (5) shows an example of the display effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) in the normal state immediately after the end of the chance time (that is, the 101st rotation after the start of the chance time). As shown in FIG. 64 (5), when the gaming state is switched from the first KT state to the normal state, the second hold display on the second hold display section 62 and the second specific display on the second specific display section 62a are not displayed. The second hold start display and the second specific display are not displayed even if a second valid start winning command is controlled (that is, even if a new valid start is made to the second start winning opening 14). On the other hand, when the player performs a left-handed operation based on the left-handed notification shown in FIG. 64 (4), a new first-start winning command is generated (that is, an effective winning in a new first-start winning port occurs). And) the first specific display is displayed on the first specific display unit 61a, and the background symbol is variably displayed on the first background symbol display unit 91a in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first small symbol display is performed. The small symbol is variably displayed in the section 91b. As a result, the start of the fluctuation display at the 101st rotation after the end of the chance time is recognized by the player. When a first start winning command is newly generated during the change display of the first special symbol, the first reserved storage number is updated, so that the first reserved storage number display 71 is updated and displayed. The first hold display on the hold display section 61 is additionally displayed.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 64, the reason why the display control of the second hold display or the second specific display differs depending on the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 63, in the first modification, in the normal state (non-KT state), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely long (for example, 5 minutes or 15 minutes), and In the state, since left-handing is recommended, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be non-display so as not to recognize that the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed. Therefore, if the control is performed in the normal state after the end of the chance time, the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed as described above with reference to FIG. Therefore, if the second hold display is displayed when the change display of the final change of the chance time (100th rotation after the start of the chance time) is completed, the second hold display is displayed when the display is switched to the normal state. Is suddenly controlled to be hidden, which may give a sense of incongruity to the player. Also, for example, if there is a second hold display that has been changed to the special mode at the end of the final change of the chance time, the second hold display is dismissed by hiding it, or the second hold display is displayed. Nevertheless, in the normal state, the effect (background design or the like) is not displayed, which may cause inconsistency in the effect. However, as described above, in the first modification, the second hold display or the second specific display is performed before the final change of the chance time ends (that is, after the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time becomes five). Is controlled so that it is difficult to visually recognize the second hold display and the second specific display, so that the degree of recognition of the player with respect to the second hold display and the second specific display is reduced, and the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed when the normal game state is entered. Can be prevented from giving a sense of incongruity. When the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time becomes five or less, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled so as to be difficult to visually recognize, but the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are visually recognized. Since display control is performed as much as possible, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed during the chance time.

  By the way, in the above-described first modification, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be difficult to visually recognize on condition that the number of remaining times until the end of the chance time is 5 or less. Is required to be 5 times or less for the following reason. That is, in the above-described first modification, since the maximum number of stored second holdings is four, a maximum of four second holding displays can be displayed, and the second specific display is also displayed during the variation display of the second special symbol. Therefore, by displaying the second hold display and the second specific display, it becomes possible for the player to recognize information of up to five changes. Therefore, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches five times, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled so as to be difficult to visually recognize, so that they are visually recognized during the chance time after the end of the chance time. It is possible to prevent the second specific display and the second hold display from being hidden. The second hold display or the second specific display is not performed on condition that the number of remaining times becomes 5 or less, but on condition that the number of remaining times becomes equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) that is more than 5 times. The display may be controlled so as to be difficult to view. Further, the display of the second hold display and the second specific display may be controlled so as to be difficult to visually recognize after the end of the chance time (after the transition to the normal state) until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, that is, the KT state. May be controlled so that the second hold display and the second specific display are difficult to visually recognize over a period before and after including the timing at which the process ends.

  Further, in the above-described Modification Example 1, on the condition that the number of remaining times until the end of the chance time is 9 or less, the advance notice of the second hold display and the specific advance notice of the second specific display are limited (not executed). However, the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 or less is as follows. That is, as described above, when the remaining number of times is 5 or less, the second hold display and the second specific display are display-controlled to be difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, if the mode of the second hold display or the second specific display controlled to be difficult to view is changed to the special mode, the display becomes difficult to view while giving the player an expectation. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's sense of expectation may be spoiled, or the effects may be inconsistent. Therefore, by restricting the suspension notice of the second suspension display on the condition that the remaining number of times becomes 9 or less, the fourth second suspension display, which is the maximum suspension number, is shifted as the second specific display after four fluctuations. At this time, the second specific display in the normal mode is simply controlled to be difficult to view even if the remaining number of times is less than or equal to 5 so that the visibility is difficult to see. It is possible to avoid. In addition, in consideration of the possibility that the second hold display may be shifted by a maximum of four fluctuations, it is necessary to restrict the hold notice of the second hold display on the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 or less. However, such a situation does not apply to the second specific display. For this reason, with respect to the second specific display, the specific notice may be limited on the condition that the number of times the display becomes difficult to view is five or less. In addition, the condition that the remaining number of times is not more than nine times is not a condition, and the condition that the remaining number of times is equal to or less than a predetermined number (e.g., 20 times) that is more than nine times is not limited to the holding notice of the second holding display or the second holding display. The specific notice of the specific display may be limited.

  By the way, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state in which the frequency of occurrence of small hits per unit time is increased, such as the KT state, the player remains when the KT state ends and shifts to the normal state. In order to confirm the success / failure result of the big hit based on the stored second hold memory, the game machine may be intentionally occupied without firing the game ball after the KT state ends. In such a case, the operation of the gaming machine is reduced in the game arcade, which is not appropriate. In addition, if the second hold display relating to the second hold memory remaining after the KT state ends can be recognized by the player, a long time (for example, if there are four long-minute fluctuations of 15 minutes, all are not displayed) The KT state ends in an unnatural display state in which the second hold display is displayed. Furthermore, even if the big hit is not always based on the remaining second hold storage, the variable display based on the second hold storage is ended and the success / failure result is displayed (the hold is exhausted). ) Takes a certain amount of time (for example, 15 minutes), so that the player misses the opportunity to end the game, and if the player continues the game, there is a possibility that the player will be disadvantaged. However, as described above, according to the first modification, the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed after the KT state ends, and the second hold display is performed during the chance time (from before the end 5 changes). By controlling the display and the second specific display so as to be difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively recognizing that there is the remaining second hold memory. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from intentionally occupying the gaming machine, thereby preventing a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine, and realizing a display without discomfort at the end of the KT state, It is possible to prevent a player from missing a chance to end the game.

  In the first modification, the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed in the KT state. However, the second hold display and the second specific display are not always displayed regardless of the game state ( Or, it is difficult to see). This is suitable, for example, in the case of a gaming machine having the following KT per non-KT per predetermined ratio. Here, the KT hit is a big hit that can be determined when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and is a big hit that is controlled in the KT state until the next big hit after the big hit game ends. Further, the non-KT hit is a big hit that can be determined when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, and is a big hit that is controlled in the normal gaming state immediately after the big hit end. In such a gaming machine having a KT hit and a non-KT hit, in the KT state after winning per KT, it is conceivable to display a second hold display to enhance the interest of the game. Then, if a non-KT hit is won in such a gaming state, when the second special symbol indicating the non-KT hit is stopped (that is, when the big hit is determined), the player makes a right hand in the KT state. Thus, it is highly possible that a maximum of four second hold displays are displayed. However, if a winning is made for a non-KT hit, the second hold display that was displayed before the big hit is determined is controlled to be non-display by controlling the normal state after the big hit game. Then, before the big hit is determined, for example, the second hold display changed to the special mode is hidden, so that the player is discouraged, or in the normal state despite the second hold display, the effect ( There is a possibility that the inconsistency of the effect is caused by not displaying the background pattern or the like. Therefore, in order to avoid such inconsistency of effects, it is difficult to visually recognize the second hold display related to the second hold memory stored after the second hold memory indicating non-KT hit in the KT state. It is preferable that display control (for example, non-display) be performed beforehand. Therefore, for example, based on the pre-reading at the time of the start winning (the second winning time determination result command), at the timing when the starting winning indicating non-KT hit occurs, the second hold display relating to the subsequent start winning (second hold memory). It is conceivable to control the display so as to make viewing difficult. However, if the display control based on such prefetching is performed, it is determined and suggested in advance that a big hit has occurred, so that the interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a non-KT hit, the second hold display may not always be displayed (or difficult to visually recognize) even in the KT state (regardless of the gaming state). By doing so, the KT state does not suggest a jackpot in advance, and even if a non-KT win is won, the second hold display is not displayed. Matching can also be avoided.

  In the above-described gaming machine having a non-KT hit, for example, at the timing when a start winning indicating a non-KT hit occurs based on the look-ahead at the time of the start winning, a second start winning (second hold storage) is performed. In addition to controlling the display of the hold display so that it is difficult to visually recognize, based on the look-ahead at the time of the start winning, at the timing when the starting winning that indicates a deviation (or a small hit) at a predetermined ratio occurs, the subsequent start winning (second The second hold display related to (hold storage) may be controlled so as to be difficult to view for a predetermined period (a predetermined number of changes). In this case, even when the jackpot is not a big hit, the second hold display may be controlled so as to be difficult to visually recognize for a predetermined period of time (so-called gasket). Since the second hold display is not displayed even if the prize is won per KT, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in the effect when the game shifts to the normal game state.

  Further, as described above, in a gaming machine having a KT hit and a non-KT hit, a display control that makes the second hold display difficult to see regardless of the gaming state, and a pre-reading based on the non-KT hit, By performing display control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the second hold display for a predetermined period when a deviation (or a small hit) occurs at a predetermined ratio, inconsistency in effects can be avoided. The display control (hereinafter, referred to as specific display control) is not limited to a gaming machine having a KT hit and a non-KT hit, but a big hit (hereinafter, referred to as a quasi non-KT hit) equivalent to a KT hit and a non-KT hit. Can be applied to gaming machines having a predetermined ratio. Here, the quasi non-KT hit is a big hit that can be determined when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, and is a predetermined number of times (for example, four times, which is the maximum number of the second hold storage) after the big hit ends. This is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the KT state only a small number of times (for example, once) and then the game is shifted to the normal game state. In such a gaming machine having a quasi-non-KT hit at a predetermined rate, when the KT state is controlled and the quasi-non-KT hit is won, the number of times controlled in the KT state after the big hit game is equal to the second reserved storage number. Less than the maximum number of. For this reason, if the second hold display is displayed while being controlled in the KT state, the KT state after the quasi-non-KT hit ends and the game is controlled to the normal game state, and the second hold display is hidden. When the second special symbol indicating the quasi-non-KT hit is stopped (i.e., when the big hit is determined), a part of up to four second hold displays (which are stored later) that may have been displayed. (The second hold display relating to the hold storage) may be hidden. For this reason, even in a gaming machine having a quasi non-KT hit at a predetermined rate in place of (or in addition to) the non-KT hit, inconsistencies in effects and the like can be avoided by performing the above-described specific display control.

  In the above description, the KT hit is a big hit that is controlled in the KT state until the next big hit after the big hit game is ended. The big hit may be controlled to the KT state more times (for example, 100 times). Even in such a case, there is a possibility of winning a non-KT hit or a quasi-non-KT hit in the KT state, so that the above-described specific display control can be similarly applied.

  Further, the above-described modification 1 is applied to a gaming machine (a so-called loop machine) controlled in a high probability state at a predetermined ratio (65%) until the next big hit, but any big hit is won. Alternatively, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine (a so-called ST machine) that is controlled in a high probability state until a predetermined number of variable displays are completed after a big hit game. In this case, it is assumed that the KT state is controlled at the same time when the control is performed in the high probability state, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be shorter than the normal state when the KT state is controlled. Thus, the frequency of occurrence of small hits per unit time may be increased. Similarly, in this case, the second hold display or the second specific display is controlled so as to be difficult to view from 5 changes before the final change controlled in the high probability state, and the second hold display is held from 9 changes before the final change. The notice and the specific notice of the second specific display may be limited.

  In addition, when controlled in the high probability state, a gaming machine (a so-called falling lottery type gaming machine) for performing a lottery (falling lottery) as to whether or not to shift to the low probability state for each change, and a variation display of a predetermined number of times are displayed. In a gaming machine controlled in a high probability state (a so-called ST type gaming machine) in a predetermined period (ST period) until the game is completed, when the game machine is controlled in a high probability state, it is controlled in a second KT state and in a low probability state. When it is controlled, it may be controlled in the non-KT state. In such a gaming machine, when shifting from the high-probability state / second KT state to the low-probability state / non-KT state (normal state), the final fluctuation (that is, falling) controlled in the KT state (second KT state) The second hold display may be controlled so as not to be visually recognized, and the second specific display may be controlled so as not to be visually recognized, in the variation that has won the falling lottery in the lottery type and the final variation in the ST period in the ST type.

  In the first modification, as described above, even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected in the normal state (non-KT state), the second hold display or the second specific display is performed. Is not displayed, and no background symbol or small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed (that is, the display effect is limited). However, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected in the normal state, not only the display effect is restricted but also the right-handed aiming for the winning in the second starting winning opening 14 is not performed. A notification effect (for example, left-handed notification) may be performed. By doing in this way, the player's recognition degree that the second special symbol is an opportunity to be variably displayed in response to the game ball winning to the second starting winning opening 14 in the normal state is reduced. In addition, it is possible to relatively increase the degree of recognition of the player that the left-handed notification is performed (right-handed is prohibited). For this reason, it is possible to reduce a right strike aimed at an improper small hit.

  In the first modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display portion 91b and the second small symbol display portion 92b are set to different positions (particularly, positions that do not overlap each other), the normal state is set when the forcible disconnection occurs. Even in this case, the small symbols may be stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display section 62b, and the small symbols may be stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display section 91b even in the KT state. For example, in the normal state, a small symbol is variably displayed on the first small symbol display section 91b in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol. In the case where the variable display of the second special symbol that has been displayed in a variable manner is forcibly released, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the forcible release is stopped in the second small symbol display section 92b. It may be displayed. Similarly, in the KT state, the small symbol is variably displayed on the second small symbol display portion 92b in accordance with the variable display of the second special symbol, but since the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation, When the variable display of the first special symbol, which has been displayed at the same time as the variable display, is forcibly removed, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the forced disconnection is displayed on the first small symbol display section 91b. The display may be stopped.

  In the first modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display section 91b and the second small symbol display section 92b are set to different positions (particularly, positions that do not overlap each other), the normal state is set at the time of a big hit. Even if there is, a small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display section 92b. For example, in the normal state, the small symbol is variably displayed on the first small symbol display portion 91b in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol. In some cases, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the big hit may be stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display section 92b. In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started while the variable display of the second special symbol indicating the big hit is being performed, the small symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display portion 92b. Later, the first normal instruction notification 56A or the second normal instruction notification 56B may be performed to positively notify the user of a big hit. Also, at this time, even if the change of the first special symbol is started, the effect related to the change of the first special symbol is restricted (for example, the change display of the background symbol or the small symbol according to the change of the first special symbol is not performed). Instead, an effect (a special effect indicating a big hit) according to the variable display of the second special symbol may be performed instead. On the other hand, when the variation display (big hit variation) of the second special symbol is completed without performing the variation display of the first special symbol, after the small symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display portion 92b, The first reduction instruction notification 56C may be performed, or the second reduction instruction notification 56D may be performed, so that a large hit may be passively notified. In the normal state, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a deviation (or a small hit) fluctuation, as described above, the small symbol is not displayed in the second small symbol display 92b (that is, a deviation or a small hit). In the case of a small hit, it is not notified depending on the display effect).

  In the first modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display portion 91b and the second small symbol display portion 92b are set to different positions (particularly, positions that do not overlap each other), the KT state is set at the time of a big hit. Even if there is, the small symbol may be stopped and displayed in the first small symbol display section 61b. For example, in the KT state, the small symbol is variably displayed on the second small symbol display portion 92b in accordance with the variable display of the second special symbol. In some cases, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the big hit may be stopped and displayed in the first small symbol display section 91b. In the KT state, since the player usually makes a right-handed hit, when the variable display of the first special symbol indicating the big hit is performed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be started. Mostly. In such a case, after the small symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display portion 91b, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed or the second normal instruction notification 56B is performed, whereby the positive symbol is positively activated. What is necessary is just to be notified that it is a big hit. Also, at this time, even if the change of the second special symbol is started, the effect related to the change of the second special symbol is restricted (for example, the change display of the background symbol or the small symbol according to the change of the second special symbol is not performed). Instead, an effect (a special effect indicating a big hit) according to the variable display of the first special symbol may be performed instead. On the other hand, although rare, for example, when the game is controlled to the KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed as in the case where a game ball is erroneously won in the first starting winning opening 13 and the player leaves the seat. When the first special symbol change display (big hit change) is finished, the first symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display portion 91b, and then the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed, or The reduction instruction notification 56D may be performed so that the big hit is passively notified. Alternatively, in the KT state, since the player normally makes a right-handed hit, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed when, for example, a game ball passes through the operation gate 17 by the right-handed or (2) The normal hit notification 56B may be performed to positively notify a big hit. In the KT state, in the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is a loss variation, as described above, no small symbol is displayed on the first small symbol display portion 91b (that is, in the case of a loss, the small symbol is displayed). (Not notified depending on the effect).

  In the above-described first modification, the difference in the KT state (the first KT state or the second KT state) is not mentioned in the reservation notice determination process in step S7079, but whether the state is the first KT state or the second KT state. May be executed in response to the request. Specifically, in the suspension notice determination process, the display mode of the second suspension display may be more easily changed to the special mode in the first KT state than in the second KT state (that is, the suspension notice may be easily performed). Good. This is for the following reason. That is, in the first KT state of the KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, the number of cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 22 is extremely small (that is, it is difficult to obtain the prize ball by the small hit). On the other hand, in the second KT state of the KT state, a small hit is likely to occur, and a game ball is likely to win in the special variable winning ball device 22 (that is, it is easy to obtain a prize ball by a small hit). Will be in a state where profits can be easily obtained. Therefore, in the second KT state, the player expects a small hit (that is, loses), but does not expect much to win a big hit that may end the second KT state (instead, does not expect a long hit). expect). On the other hand, in the first KT state, it is difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball even if a small hit occurs, so the player expects a big hit instead of a small hit. For this reason, in the first KT state, the suspension notice is more easily performed than in the second KT state, thereby increasing the expectation of the player who expects a big hit in the first KT state, and expects a small hit in the second KT state. The expectation of the player can be prevented from being spoiled. For the same reason, in the specific notice determination process of step S9307, the display mode of the second specific display is more likely to be changed to the special mode in the first KT state than in the second KT state (that is, the specific notice is performed). (Easy). In addition, as a display result of the variable display of the second special symbol, if a non-small hit other than the big hit (normal slip) has a predetermined ratio, the second hold display or the second specific display is a small hit. The suspension notice or the specific notice that changes to a mode in which a certain expectation is expected (for example, a character display of “small”) may be performed.

  In the first modification, as described with reference to FIG. 60, the effect control microcomputer 200 grasps the number of remaining times until the end of the chance time, and the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 or less. In such a case, the execution of the preliminary notice is restricted. However, whether or not to limit the suspension notice may be determined by the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, the microcomputer 560 for game control counts the number of changes after controlling to the low probability / first KT state after the big hit game, thereby grasping the number of times remaining until the end of the chance time, and ending the chance time. If the remaining number of times is 9 or less, a command to prohibit the suspension notice may be transmitted as the second prize time determination result command transmitted when the second valid start prize is generated. In this way, the effect control microcomputer 200 that receives the second prize-time determination result command does not know the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time, and makes a hold notice based on the second prize-time determination result command. It can be determined whether to execute or prohibit. The effect control microcomputer 200 can execute the suspension notice only when receiving a predetermined suspension notice command from the game control microcomputer 560, and the game control microcomputer 560 If the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time becomes nine or less, the hold notice command may not be transmitted even if the second effective start winning is generated. Even in such a case, the effect control microcomputer 200 can determine whether to execute or prohibit the advance notice based on the advance notice command without grasping the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time. In the same manner, whether or not to limit the specific notice may be determined not by the effect control microcomputer 200 but by the game control microcomputer 560.

  As described above, according to the first modification, the gaming machine that can variably display the identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (a big hit state in this example) that is advantageous to the player. Variable display execution means (in this example, game play) capable of executing variable display of identification information (in this example, first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (in this example, second special symbol) in parallel A predetermined state control means (the part which executes steps S26A and S26B in the control microcomputer 560) and a predetermined state which is advantageous to the player and which is different from the advantageous state (in this example, a small hitting game state). In the example, the portion that executes steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560), the normal state (in this example, the non-KT state), and the second identification information more than the normal state. By selecting a short variation time at a high rate as the execution time of the variable display (refer to FIG. 13 in this example), it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency is controlled to a predetermined state. (In this example, a portion that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560) and information on the variable display of the first identification information is stored in the first hold. A first holding storage unit (in this example, a first holding storage buffer) that can be stored as a second holding storage unit (in this example, information relating to the variable display of the second identification information) that can be stored as a second holding storage. A second hold storage buffer) and a first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage (in this example, a first hold table in the first hold display unit 61) ) And a second holding display (in this example, a second holding display in the second holding display section 62) corresponding to the second holding storage (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200). In step S707), the hold display unit performs the second hold in the specific period including the timing at which the special state ends (in this example, the remaining five changes or less until the end of the chance time). It is possible to make display difficult to see (in this example, see FIG. 64). Thus, in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the special state, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. More specifically, when the special state ends, appropriate display control can be realized for the second hold display. Note that the specific period may be a period including the timing when the special state (the KT state in this example) ends, and is not limited to a period from before the end of the special state until the end (for example, 5 fluctuations before the end). It may include a predetermined period (for example, five changes after the end) after the end of the special state (after the transition to the normal state).

  For example, in JP-A-2017-86643 (Prior Art 1) and JP-A-2006-202287 (Prior Art 2), in a high probability state (special state) of a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), It is described that by setting the fluctuation time of the identification information shorter than the normal state (low probability state), the control can be performed in a state where the frequency of occurrence of small hits is higher than in the normal state. By the way, in the related arts 1 and 2 that can be controlled in the special state as described above, the fluctuation time of the second identification information is set to be relatively long in the normal state. Specifically, in Conventional Technique 1, it is set to 180 seconds to 300 seconds, and in Conventional Technique 2, it is set to 10 hours. As described above, in the gaming machine described in the related arts 1 and 2, in the normal state, the change time of the second identification information is long, and in the normal state, the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage (the second hold display) ) Is not appropriate to be visible. Therefore, by configuring as in the above-described first modification, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display.

  According to the first modification, when performing variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol), the specific display corresponding to the second identification information (in this example, the second identification A specific display means (in this example, a part for executing steps S9308 and S9310 in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of displaying the second specific display on the display unit 62a is further provided, and the specific period (in this example, a chance in this example) During periods other than the period of 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the time), the hold display means can display the second hold display and the specific display means can display the specific display. It is possible to make the second hold display difficult to see (in this example, if step S7081 is Y, step S7082 is not executed) and the specific display means And difficult visually recognize the constant display (in this example, does not execute the step S9310 if it is Y in Step S9309) It is possible, it was decided. Thereby, when the special state ends, appropriate display control can be realized for the specific display corresponding to the second identification information.

  Further, according to the first modification, the pre-determining means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the establishment of the start condition (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S65A and S65B) And a specific determination unit (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an advantageous state is established based on the second hold storage before the determination by the preliminary determination unit). S216, S322), and the suspension display unit displays a second suspension display corresponding to the second suspension storage determined by the specific determination unit in accordance with the determination result of the specific determination unit. A first mode change effect (in this example, a reservation notice) for changing to the first special mode can be executed, and the specific display means determines the advance in accordance with the determination result of the advance determination means. A second mode change effect (in this example, a specific notice) for changing the specific display corresponding to the second identification information that has been determined by the determining means to the second special mode, and a predetermined period including the specific period In this example, during the period in which the remaining time is 9 or less until the end of the chance time, the hold display means restricts the execution of the first mode change effect (in this example, if step S7078 is Y, step S7079 is executed). (No), and the specific display means restricts the execution of the second mode change effect (in this example, if S is Y in step S9306, step S9307 is not executed). Thereby, it is possible to avoid the inconsistency of the effects in the specific period in which the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage and the specific display corresponding to the second identification information are difficult to visually recognize.

  Further, according to the first modification, the state control unit determines that the special state is the first special state (in this example, the first KT state) and the second special state (the main state) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. In the example, it can be controlled to the second KT state). Thereby, the monotonousness of the game property in the special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game when controlling to the special state can be improved.

  According to the first modification, in response to the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the effect symbols (in this example, the background symbols in the first background symbol display section 91a and the second background symbol display section 92a) is performed. Effect control means (effect control in this example) capable of performing variable display of a reduced symbol (in this example, a small symbol in the first small symbol display portion 91b and the second small symbol display portion 92b) smaller than the effect symbol. Portion for executing S920D, S920E, S920H, S920I, S920K in the microcomputer 200, and the effect control means is adapted to variably display the first identification information in the normal state (non-KT state in this example). An effect symbol (in this example, a background symbol in the first background symbol display section 91a) is variably displayed, and an effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second symbol). The variable display of the scenery symbol display unit 92a (background symbol) is not executed (in this example, step S920E is executed if Y in step S920C, and step S920J is executed if N in step S920G). In the special state (in this example, the KT state), the effect design corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the effect design corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is not executed. (In the present example, if the answer is Y in step S920G, step S920I is executed, and if the answer is N in step S920C, step S920F is executed), depending on whether the state is controlled to the normal state or the special state. A reduced symbol corresponding to the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information (in this example, the first small symbol display portion 91b or the second small symbol) Performing variable display of small symbols) in radical 113 92b (in this example, perform one of the steps S920D and S920H depending on whether KT state is a non-KT state), it was decided. Accordingly, appropriate display control corresponding to the state of the reduced symbol can be realized, and the degree of recognition of the variable display of the second identification information by the player in the normal state can be reduced.

  According to the first modification, in the normal state (in this example, the non-KT state), the hold display means can display the first hold display, but cannot display the second hold display (this state). In the example, if Y in step S7073, step S7075 is executed, and if N in step S7077, steps S7080 and S7082 are not executed.) Thereby, in the normal state, the visibility of the player for the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage can be reduced, and appropriate display control for the second hold display can be realized.

  According to the first modification, the hold display means displays the first hold storage number corresponding to the number of the first hold storages (in this example, regardless of whether the hold state is controlled to the normal state or the special state). , The first reserved storage number display 71), and the second reserved number display corresponding to the number of the second reserved storages is not displayed (in the present example, if Y in step S7071 is performed, step S7072 is executed. Even if Y in S7076, the process corresponding to step S7072 is not performed). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the player with respect to the number of the second holding storages while securing the player's recognizability with respect to the number of the first holding storages. Appropriate display control can be realized for the number of pending storages.

  Further, according to the first modification, a predetermined path (in the present example, to the right of the game area 7) of the flow-down paths along which the game medium (the game balls in this example) flows is provided, and the game medium can pass through. After a specific area (in this example, the operation gate 17) and a predetermined condition (in this example, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) are satisfied, an advantageous state (this In the example, the advantageous state control means (in this example, the part that executes steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 in the case of Y in step S2501 in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to the big hit game state) Executing a predetermined promotion notification (in this example, a first instruction notification) for promoting the emission of the game medium to a predetermined route based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition; After a fixed period (in this example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, promotion notification means (in this example, second instruction notification) capable of executing specific promotion notification (in this example, second instruction notification) for promoting the emission of the game medium to the specific area. (Steps S4404, S4405, S4604, and S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200). Thus, it is possible to appropriately notify a trigger for controlling to an advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the effect.

[Modification 2]
Hereinafter, a second modification of the above-described embodiment will be described. In the second modification, an example of display control of a game value (in the present example, the number of winning prize balls) given to a player in a KT state (a first KT state or a second KT state) will be mainly described. Note that, in the following, after the jackpot is won in the second KT state controlled in the second KT state (16R probable jackpot or sudden jackpot), the period from the winning to the next big hit (that is, the jackpot gaming state and the subsequent second KT state are included) The acquired number of prize balls is referred to as a special rush medium pitch (or a specific pitch), and the display of the specific pitch is referred to as a specific pitch display. In addition, the total number of award balls acquired from the time when the jackpot is won for the first time and the state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state to the end of the KT state (transition to the normal state) is calculated as the total number of balls (or special balls). This special ball display may be referred to as a special ball display. The specific ball display is displayed based on the value of the second prize ball counter, and the special ball display is displayed based on the value of the first prize ball counter. Further, in the second modification, mainly the portions different from the above-described embodiment will be described, and the other portions will be described as having the same configuration and processing as the above-described embodiment unless otherwise specified. Is omitted.

  In the second modification, a big hit type determination table different from the above-described embodiment is used. Specifically, the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 65 is used instead of the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the second modification, when performing the variation display of the first special symbol, “16R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 35%, and “16R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 25%. 2R probable big hit (sudden big hit) "and 40% probability" 16R normal big hit ". Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the second modification, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, “16R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 45%, and a probability of 15% is determined. Is determined to be "2R probable big hit (probable big hit)", and is determined to be "16R normal big hit" with a probability of 40%.

  The “16R probability changing big hit” means that the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is controlled in the 16 rounds of the big hit gaming state in the 16 rounds for a predetermined period (for example, until 10 game balls win or 29 seconds elapse). ) It is a big hit that is released and controlled to the high probability / second KT state until the next big hit occurs after the big hit game state ends. The “2R probable jackpot” is controlled to a two-hit jackpot game state, but the special variable prize ball device 20 is opened for only a very short time (for example, 0.1 second) in each of the two rounds. As a result, the jackpot is controlled to a jackpot game state in which it is substantially difficult to obtain a prize ball, and after the jackpot game state ends, the jackpot is controlled to the high probability / second KT state until the next jackpot occurs. The “16R normal big hit” means that the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is controlled for a predetermined period (for example, 10 game balls are won or 29 seconds elapse) in 16 rounds by controlling the game mode to a 16-bit big hit game state. ) It is a big hit that is released and controlled to the low probability / first KT state until the change display of 100 times is ended after the big hit game state ends. It should be noted that after 100 times of variable display controlled to the low probability / first KT state are completed, the state is shifted to the normal state. In addition, even before the end of the 100 variable displays controlled to the low probability / first KT state, if the next big hit occurs, the low probability / first KT state ends and the big hit game state is reached. After the transition to the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is controlled according to the type of big hit.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, all small hits are made except for the case of the big hit. However, in the second modification, FIG. The small hit determination table shown in (d) is used to determine whether to make a small hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, “losing” is determined with a probability of 100%, and “small hit” is not determined. As shown in FIG. 65 (d), in the case of performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit is determined with a probability of 70%, and the loss is determined with a probability of 30%. As described above, in the second modified example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a case where a large hit does not occur and a small hit does not occur. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 73, in the second modification, since small hits do not always occur, when a small hit occurs continuously, a special effect for notifying the fact (see FIG. 73) The small hit combo display 86) shown is performed. In the second modification, it is assumed that a small hit does not occur when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, but a lower ratio (for example, 1%) than when performing the variable display of the second special symbol. May cause a small hit. Even in this case, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the small hit is determined with a higher probability than when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. The degree of advantage of the display can be made higher than the variable display of the first special symbol.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the prize ball addition display process (step S657 in FIG. 45) in the second modification. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 72, the prize ball addition display processing of the second modification is performed, so that the aspect varies depending on the number of game balls winning the special winning opening 24 of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22. Is displayed. In the second modification, in steps S652 and S655 in FIG. 45, if the display of the special ball display is set (see step S976L described later), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first winning ball after the addition. When the special payout display is updated based on the value of the number counter and the display of the specific payout display is set (see steps S976C, S976G, and S976K described later), the second prize ball number counter after the addition is displayed. The specific payout display is updated based on the value.

  In the prize ball addition display processing, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the number of the special prize port 24 in the single small hit opening period based on the received special prize port prize designation command. It is determined whether the number is equal to or more than a predetermined number (three in this example) (step S657A). The one small hit opening period refers to a period in which the special winning opening 24 is opened in the small hitting game state controlled by winning one small hit. Here, the small hit opening period may include a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the special winning opening 24 is closed. This is because, even after the special winning opening 24 is closed, a predetermined time may be required until the game balls staying in the special winning opening 24 are detected by the second count switch 25a.

  The effect control CPU 201 displays the prize ball addition display in a special addition mode when the winning is to the third or more special winning opening 24 in one small hit opening period (Y in step S657A) ( (Step S657B) If it is a prize to the special winning opening 24 of less than the third (first or second) special winning opening 24 in one small hit opening period (N in step S657A), the prize ball addition display is displayed. It is displayed in the normal addition mode (step S657C). Here, the prize ball addition display is a display effect indicating that a prize ball (in this case, “10”) has been obtained by one game ball winning in the special winning opening 24, for example, “+10”. (See prize ball addition display 83 shown in FIG. 72). The normal addition mode is a display mode in which the prize ball addition display is displayed in, for example, a small size of black characters (see FIGS. 72 (1) and (2)). This is a display mode in which the image is displayed in a medium size to emphasize the normal addition mode (see FIG. 72 (3)). Note that the normal addition mode and the special addition mode are not limited to the above, and the special addition mode may be any mode as long as it is more emphasized than the normal addition mode. Thereby, when a predetermined number (three) or more of the special prize openings 24 are won in one small hit opening period, the player is notified by the emphasized prize ball addition display.

  Note that, in step S658 in FIG. 45, the same processing as in step S657 shown in FIG. 66 may be performed. That is, in the case of a winning in the third or more special winning opening 24 in one small hit opening period, a special sound is output from the speaker 27 as a winning sound, and one small hit opening period. In the case of winning in the special winning opening 24 less than the third special winning opening 24, the normal sound is output from the speaker 27 as the winning sound, and the special sound is emphasized more than the normal sound (for example, when the volume is larger, The sound may be longer (e.g., longer output time, higher pitch, etc.). Thereby, when a predetermined number (three) or more of the special winning ports 24 are won in one small hit opening period, the player is notified of the fact by the emphasized winning sound.

  As can be seen from the flowchart shown in FIG. 66 and the flowchart shown in FIG. 45, when the game is controlled to the second KT state (Y in step S656), every time a game ball wins in the special winning opening 24, a prize ball is won. The addition display is displayed (step S657), and when the specific payout display is displayed, the display content of the specific payout display based on the second prize ball counter corresponding to the prize ball addition display. Is also updated (Step S655 of Modification 2). Thereby, in the second KT state where it is easy to obtain a corresponding prize ball when the small hitting game is performed, it is possible to emphasize the winning of the game ball in the small hitting gaming state. On the other hand, when the game is controlled to the first KT state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball even when the small hit game is performed (N in step S656), the prize ball addition display is not displayed.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the process table selection processing (step S976 in FIG. 53) in the second modification. Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71, when the process table selection processing of the second modification is performed, a specific payout display or a special payout display is displayed in the big hit game state or the KT state, and 2R In the case of winning the certain-variable big hit (sudden big hit), the notification effect related to being controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit notification effect) is not executed, while the specific payout display is continuously displayed. Note that, in the second modification, the processing shown in FIG. 67 is performed, so that the processing in step S983 in FIG. 53 is omitted.

  In the process table selection process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the control has been controlled to the second KT state when the large hit start designation command is received (that is, whether or not a large hit has been performed when controlled to the second KT state). Is determined (step S976A). If a big hit is made when the state is not the second KT state (when the state is the first KT state or the non-KT state) (N in step S976A), the effect control CPU 201 determines that the big hit start specifying command is the big hit start specifying command of the 16R normal big hit. It is determined whether there is a big hit (ie, whether it is a 16R normal big hit) or not (step S976J). If it is a 16R certain variable big hit or a 2R certain big hit (sudden big hit) (N in step S976J), the specific payout display ( The display of the specific payout display 82 shown in FIG. 70 is set (step S976K). As a result, when the 16R probability variable hit or the 2R probability variable hit is won in the second KT state, the display of the specific payout display is started. The specific payout display is displayed based on the value of the second prize ball counter. On the other hand, in the case of the 16R normal big hit (Y in step S976J), the display of the specific payout display is not set (the process of step S976K is not executed), and the process proceeds to step S976L.

  In the case of a big hit in the second KT state (Y in step S976A), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not a 2R certain-variable big hit (a sudden big hit) (step S976B). In step S976B (Y), the display of the specific payout display (the specific payout display 82 shown in FIG. 70) is continuously set (step S976C), and it is notified that the game has shifted to the big hit game state. A non-notification type jackpot notification effect is set as the jackpot notification effect (step S976D). Since the control in the second KT state is performed when the 16R probability change hit or the 2R probability change hit is won, the display of the specific payout display is set in the second KT state (step S976K or step S976G described later). reference). Therefore, in step S976C, the specific payout display that has already been set to be displayed is continuously set. In addition, in step S976D, if the non-report type jackpot notification effect is set, the jackpot notification effect is not executed on the effect display device 9, or even if executed, the visibility is low (for example, a very limited amount). A jackpot notification effect (displayed in the area) is executed. For this reason, the player is not informed stating that the game has shifted to the big hit game state.

  If it is not a sudden hit (N in step S976B), effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a 16R probability variable hit (step S976E), and if it is a 16R probability variable hit (Y in step S976E), The second prize ball number counter is reset (step S976F), the displayed specific payout display ends, and a new specific payout display is set (step S976G). As a result, the specific payout display is displayed based on the second prize ball number counter from which counting is newly started. It should be noted that the specific ball display displayed based on the second prize ball counter before the reset is not terminated but is stored and managed as a history display, and the specific ball display displayed newly is displayed. May be displayed separately. By doing in this way, the number of award balls acquired from winning a jackpot (16R probability variable jackpot or sudden jackpot) controlled in the second KT state to the next jackpot (that is, by one jackpot) Can be confirmed for each big hit. Note that the history display may be reset when the KT state ends and the state transitions to the normal state.

  In the case of a 16R normal big hit (N in step S976E), effect control CPU 201 resets the second winning ball counter (step S976H), and ends the displayed specific payout display (step S976I). . Note that the specific payout display that has been displayed based on the second prize ball counter before the resetting may be stored and managed as a history display instead of being terminated.

  After the processing of Y and S976K in steps S976G, S976I and S976J, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the special ball display (the special ball display 85 shown in FIG. 70) (step S976L), and the big hit game state. A jackpot notification effect of a notification type corresponding to the type of the jackpot is set as the jackpot notification effect for notifying that the process has been shifted to (step S976M). In step S976L, the special payout display is displayed based on the value of the first prize ball counter, and the first prize ball counter is reset in the process of step S980 in FIG. Reset when a hit occurs. Also, in step S976M, when the big hit notification effect of the notification type is set, the big hit notification effect is executed by the effect display device 9, and the player is informed that the game is in the big hit game state. Be informed.

  After the processes of steps S976D and S976M, the effect control CPU 201 sets the set jackpot notification effect (steps S976D and S976M), the set specific ball display (steps S976C, S976G, S976I, S976K) and the special effect. A process table corresponding to the ball display (step S976L) or the like is selected (step S976N). Thereby, various effects of the set contents are output from the effect devices (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) by the subsequent processing.

  In the second modification, the processing of steps S9007 to S9010 shown in FIG. 55 is modified as follows. That is, in the second modification, if the display setting of the specific ball display and the display setting of the special ball display are performed in the process illustrated in FIG. 67, the display setting is continued. As a result, even if the big hit game state ends, the specific payout display and the special payout display displayed in the big hit game state are continuously displayed in the KT state after the big hit game. At this time, the display mode such as the display position or the display size of the specific payout display or the special payout display may be changed. In addition, the special payout display may be set to non-display when controlled to the normal state. The special payout display may be set to be non-display at the end of the big hit game, so that the special payout display is displayed in the big hit game state and not displayed in the KT state after the big hit game.

  As can be seen from the flow chart shown in FIG. 67, when a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot is won and the game is controlled to the second KT state after the jackpot game (N in step S976J), the specific payout The display display is set (step S976K), but when the 16R normal big hit is won and the first KT state is controlled after the big hit game (Y in step S976J), the display of the specific payout display is not set. When controlled to the first KT state, the specific ball display may not be displayed but the specific ball display may be limited. Specifically, when the game is controlled to the first KT state, the specific payout display is displayed in a mode (for example, the display size is reduced) with lower visibility than when the game is controlled to the second KT state. It may be a thing. Alternatively, when controlled to the first KT state, different from when controlled to the second KT state, the specific payout display may be displayed only for a very short period (for example, only one change).

  By the way, in the second KT state, it is in a state where it is easy to obtain a corresponding prize ball in the small hitting game, so that a specific payout display is displayed in order to notify the game value (the number of acquired prize balls) given to the player. (More specifically, the display is updated in accordance with the winning of the game ball), so that the player can visually recognize the increase in the number of obtained prize balls in the second KT state, thereby improving the interest. On the other hand, in the first KT state, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball in the small hitting game, so that the number of prize balls that can be acquired is smaller than the number of game balls launched, thereby reducing the game value (acquired prize ball number). Is a state that can be reduced. Therefore, it is not appropriate to notify the game value in such a state. Therefore, in the second KT state, the specific ball display is displayed, thereby increasing the sense of expectation of the player expecting a small hit, and in the first KT state, the player is not discouraged by not displaying the specific ball display. can do.

  As can be seen from the flowchart shown in FIG. 67, the display setting of the special payout display and the display setting of the specific payout display are performed separately (steps S976C, S976G, S976I, S976K, S976L). Therefore, in the KT state after the big hit game, it is possible to display the specific payout display and the special payout display separately (see FIG. 68 described later).

  Further, as can be seen from the flowchart shown in FIG. 67, when the game is controlled to the second KT state and a sudden jackpot is won (Y in step S976B), the jackpot notification effect is not executed, and the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state. Is not notified to the player (step S976D), and when a jackpot other than a sudden jackpot is won, a jackpot notification effect is executed to notify the player of the transition to the jackpot gaming state (step S976M). ). In addition, when the game is controlled to the second KT state and a winning is achieved in a sudden hit, the specific payout display is continuously displayed (step S976D). As a result, the second KT state is still continued based on the previous jackpot (the jackpot before the current jackpot) without notifying the player that the jackpot has been won (that is, the jackpot has not yet been hit). ) You can show it as if.

  By the way, when a hit is won, the special variable prize ball device 20 is opened for a short time, so that it may be noticed that the hit has been won. For this reason, in the case of winning a sudden big hit, the special winning opening 24 may be opened instead of the special variable winning ball device 20. By doing so, it is possible to make it appear as if the small hit has been won, and it is possible to make it more difficult to notice that the sudden big hit has been won.

  Also, when a big hit signal (big hit signal 1 or big hit signal 2) is externally output when a sudden big hit is won, a big hit counter installed outside the gaming machine is counted up based on the big hit signal. There is. If the big hit counter is displayed in a count-up manner as described above, there is a possibility that the fact that the big hit has been won may be noticed. For this reason, in the second KT state, the jackpot signal may not be externally output when a sudden jackpot is won, but the jackpot signal may be externally output when a jackpot other than the jackpot is won. Note that, when the game is won in the sudden jackpot while being controlled in the first KT state (N in step S976J), the subsequent gaming state changes from the first KT state to the second KT state, and thus the big hit notification effect is executed. (Step S976M). For this reason, if a big hit occurs while being controlled in the first KT state, a big hit signal may be externally output regardless of the type of the big hit.

  As can be seen from the flowchart shown in FIG. 67, the specific payout display that is displayed when the game is controlled to the second KT state is continued when a sudden big hit is won (step S976C), and 16R When the normal jackpot is won, the display is terminated (step S976I), and when the 16R certain variable hit is won, the display is newly started by resetting the second prize ball counter (step S976G). . Therefore, when a sudden jackpot is won in the second KT state, the update of the specific payout display is continued, so that it appears as if the second KT state has continued for a long time (that is, the big hit has not yet been made). be able to. Further, in the second KT state, since it is a state in which it is easy to obtain a corresponding prize ball in the small hitting game, the player expects that the second KT state will continue for a long time (that is, no big hit will occur). For this reason, when a sudden jackpot is won in the second KT state, the big hit notification effect is not executed, and the specific payout display is continuously displayed, so that the second KT state is continued (not interrupted). It can be seen as if the second KT state lasts longer than the actual jackpot probability (that is, does not hit for a long time).

[Screen layout]
Next, a screen layout (display screen) in the effect display device 9 displayed by the processing shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 66 and 67 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 (1) shows an example of the screen layout in the first KT state (low probability state), and FIG. 63 (2) shows an example of the screen layout in the second KT state (high probability state). Note that, in the screen layout of Modification 2 shown in FIG. 66, portions common to the screen layout of Modification 1 shown in FIG. 63 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (1), in the low probability / first KT state (chance time), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) indicates that the chance time is currently being displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. A display (for example, a character display such as “during chance time”) is performed, and below it, a special payout display 85 (for example, a character display of “TOTAL 2040pt” indicating a total payout) is displayed. With this special ball display 85, the player is notified of the game value (total ball that is the total number of acquired prize balls) provided from the first hit to the present when the first KT state is controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (2), in the high probability / second KT state (special rush), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) indicates that the special rush is being performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. A display (for example, a character display such as “during special rush”) is performed, and a special payout display 85 (for example, a character display of “TOTAL 2040pt” indicating a total payout) is displayed below the display. With this special ball display 85, the player is notified of the game value (total ball that is the total number of acquired prize balls) provided from the initial hit to the present time when the game is controlled to the second KT state. In the lower right corner of the display screen, a specific payout display 82 (for example, a character display of “2040 pt during special rush” indicating a special payout during special rush) is displayed. According to the specific payout display 82, a jackpot (16R probability variable jackpot or sudden jackpot) that has been controlled in the second KT state is won, and then the next jackpot is won (accurately, a jackpot other than the jackpot is won). The number of prize balls acquired up to that point (that is, in the period including the big hit gaming state and the subsequent second KT state) is notified to the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 68 (1) and (2), the specific payout display 82 is displayed in the second KT state, whereas the specific payout display 82 is not displayed in the first KT state. Thereby, in the second KT state in which it is easy to obtain a corresponding prize ball in the small hit game, the specific payout display 82 is displayed, thereby increasing the sense of expectation of the player expecting the small hit, and increasing the prize ball in the small hit game. In the difficult first KT state, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by not displaying the specific payout display 82. Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (2), in the second KT state, the special payout display 85 and the specific payout display 82 are displayed so as to be distinguishable. By paying attention to the specific ball display 82, the player can confirm how long the second KT state has continued and how many prize balls have been acquired during the second KT state. By paying attention to, it is also possible to check the total number of balls that have been obtained so far (the total number of prize balls).

[Example of display control of specific ball display and special ball display]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, an example of display control of the specific payout display and the special payout display will be described. FIG. 69 (1) shows an example of a time chart when the 16R certain-variable-big-hit is won as an opportunity to be controlled in the second KT state as an initial hit, and FIG. 69 (2) shows an opportunity to be controlled in the first KT state. An example of a time chart when a 16R normal big hit is won is shown.

  As shown in the time chart of FIG. 69 (1), when a 16R certain-variable big hit is won as a first hit (in a non-KT state), a big hit notification for notifying that the game has shifted to the big hit gaming state in the big hit gaming state. An effect is executed, and then the state is controlled to the second KT state. Then, when controlled in the second KT state, even if the 2R probability variable big hit (sudden probability big hit) is won, the big hit notification effect for notifying that the game has shifted to the big hit gaming state is not executed (not notified). . Then, when the 16R normal big hit is won while being controlled to the second KT state, a big hit notification effect is executed in the big hit game state. At this time, the specific payout display is continuously updated and displayed during the period in which the big hit game of the 16R probability change big hit is started and is controlled in the second KT state. It is updated and displayed (the second prize ball number counter is not reset). Then, by winning a big hit (16R normal big hit) which is not a sudden big hit, the display of the specific payout display ends, and the second prize ball number counter is reset. When a 16R probability variable jackpot is won as a jackpot other than a sudden jackpot, the second prize ball counter is reset, and the count display of the specific payout display is newly started.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69 (1), the special payout display is updated continuously based on the first prize ball counter after the initial hit (16R probability variable big hit), and FIG. As shown in (2), when the 16R normal jackpot, which is a trigger to be controlled in the first KT state, is won and the first KT state of the specified number of times (100 times) is ended, the display is ended (first state). The prize ball counter is reset at the next first hit). Note that the special payout display is also displayed as a result display during the extended holiday in the final fluctuation (outfall fluctuation) controlled to the first KT state.

  Next, an example of a display effect displayed on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the time chart shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 shows an example of a display effect displayed on the effect display device 9 corresponding to the time chart shown in FIG. 69 (1), and FIG. 71 shows an effect corresponding to the time chart shown in FIG. 69 (2). An example of a display effect displayed on the display device 9 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (1), when the 16R probability variable jackpot is won as the first hit, a right-handed aiming at the special variable winning prize ball device 20, for example, a game ball prize may be made as the big hit notification effect in the big hit game state. It is notified that it has shifted to the jackpot game state. Also, at this time, the specific payout display 82 (for example, “2040 pt”) is displayed based on the second prize ball counter that starts counting after the first hit, and the counting starts after the first hit. A special payout display 85 (for example, “2040 pt”) is displayed based on the first prize ball number counter. At this time, the payout (the number of acquired prize balls) indicated by the specific payout display 82 and the payout indicated by the special payout display 85 match.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (2), when the game is controlled to the second KT state after the big hit game, the specific payout display 82 is continuously displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device). The special payout display 85 is continuously displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen. Further, in the second KT state, by performing right-handing, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is not a big hit, a small hit is won with a predetermined probability (70%). When the small hit is won, the background symbol displayed on the second background symbol display portion 92a and the small symbol displayed on the second small symbol display portion 92b are changed to symbols indicating the small hit (for example, “1”, “3”, “ 5)) is stopped. In addition, as a symbol indicating a small hit, a special symbol (for example, a picture symbol) different from a normal gap may be stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (3), when one small ball is won to the special winning opening 24 in one small hit opening period while the small hit is won and controlled to the small hit game state, the game is performed. A prize ball addition display 83 (for example, a character display of “+10”) is displayed as a prize effect corresponding to the prize of the ball. Note that the prize ball addition display 83 is displayed in a normal addition mode or a special addition mode, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, at this time, the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter are updated and displayed, so that the specific payout display 82 and the special payout display 85 correspond to the display of the prize ball addition display 83. The display content is also updated (for example, the display content is updated from “2040 pt” to “2050 pt”).

  As described above, in the second KT state, a small hit occurs and the prize ball addition display 83 is displayed every time a game ball wins in the special winning opening 24 during the small hit opening period, and the prize ball addition display 83 is displayed. In response to this, the display contents of the specific payout display 82 and the special payout display 85 are updated. Although not shown, in the big hit game state or the KT state, the value indicated by the updated special ball display 85 (total ball displayed by the first prize ball counter) is a predetermined target value (for example, 2500 pt, When it reaches a target value set at predetermined intervals, such as 5000 pt, 7500 pt, etc., an attained ball display effect for notifying the fact (for example, a character display such as “2500 pt OVER”) is executed. In this way, when the attained ball display effect is executed, the special ball display 85 may not be displayed in the KT state. In the second KT state, when the small hit is won and the small hit game state is controlled, the second specific display and the second hold display are controlled to be non-display, and the small hit game state is set. It may be made to attract attention.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (4), when the game is controlled to the second KT state, if a sudden jackpot is won, the background symbol displayed on the second background symbol display section 92a and the second symbol displayed on the second small symbol display section 92b are displayed. The small symbol to be displayed is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the symbol indicating the big hit (for example, a gap between “3”, “5”, and “7”). As a result, the fact that the jackpot has been won is not notified to the player. At this time, a symbol indicating a small hit (for example, “1”, “3”, “5”) may be stopped and displayed as a symbol different from the symbol indicating the big hit. By doing so, it is possible to make it appear as if the small hit was won instead of the sudden big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (5), even if the jackpot is won and a transition to the jackpot game state is made, the jackpot notification effect is not executed, so that it is not notified that the jackpot has been won. At this time, the specific payout display 82 is continuously displayed as it is (the second prize ball number counter is not reset). Therefore, it is possible to show as if the big hit has not been won (as if the small hit has been won or it was just a loss). Note that, when the game ball has won the special variable winning ball device 20 in the big hit game state, the same as the prize ball addition display 83 displayed when the game ball has won the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game state. Should be performed. By doing so, it is possible to make it more difficult to notice that the victory has been won. In addition, as described above, in the case of winning a sudden jackpot, the special winning port 24 is opened instead of the special variable winning ball device 20, so that it appears as if the small hit has been won. Can be.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (6), when the game is controlled to the second KT state and a 16R normal jackpot is won, the background symbol displayed on the second background symbol display portion 92a and the second small symbol display portion 92b are displayed. The displayed small symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a big hit (for example, "6", "6", "6"). This informs the player that the big hit has been won.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (7), when the player wins the 16R normal big hit and shifts to the big hit game state, as a big hit notification effect, for example, a right-handed shot aiming at a game ball winning to the special variable winning ball device 20 may be performed. It is notified that it has shifted to the jackpot game state. At this time, the second prize ball counter is reset, and the display of the specific payout display 82 ends. The special payout display 85 is updated and displayed based on the first prize ball counter (for example, the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit game of the 16R normal big hit is added and “4540 pt” is displayed. ).

  In FIG. 70 (6), if the player wins the 16R certain-variable big hit while being controlled to the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 70 (7A), the game shifts to the big hit gaming state and the big hit notification effect is executed. At this time, the second prize ball counter is reset, and the display of the specific payout display 82 is newly started. As a result, the total number of prize balls acquired by one big hit (precisely, not including a sudden big hit in the second KT state) that triggers the control of the second KT state does not extend over a plurality of big hits. Will be displayed for every single big hit. As a result, how many prize balls have been obtained for each one of the big hits that triggers the control of the second KT state, that is, for how long the second KT state has continued (that is, how long the big hit has been Can be checked. At this time, the payout (the number of acquired prize balls) indicated by the specific payout display 82 does not match the payout indicated by the special payout display 85.

  As described above, when the second prize ball number counter is reset and the display of the specific ball display 82 that has been displayed so far ends, the specific ball display 82 that has been displayed is displayed separately as a history display. It may be done. In addition, the payout indicated by the history display (special rush payout during special rush) is stored in the nonvolatile memory for a predetermined period (for example, one week), and based on the stored history display, the payout indicated by the current history display. May be displayed. It should be noted that a high ranking of the specific payout display 82 (history display) means that the period during which the second KT state is controlled is long (the number of wins in the small hit is large), that is, the long hit Will not be elected (except for winning a jackpot that is not announced). For this reason, the ranking of the specific payout display 82 (history display) can be called a so-called “added” ranking. The ranking of the history display (or the payout indicated by the history display) may be resettable based on the operation of the hall clerk.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (1), when the 16R normal jackpot is won and the first KT state is controlled, the specific payout display 82 is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device). Instead, the special payout display 85 is continuously displayed at the upper left of the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (2), even in the first KT state, the right display is performed, so that the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Win. However, in the second KT state, it is possible to acquire a corresponding prize ball by winning the small hit and controlling the small hit game state, whereas in the first KT state, the small hit is won and the small hit game state is obtained. It is difficult to get a prize ball even if it is controlled. For this reason, in the first KT state, even if a small hit is won, a symbol (for example, a symbol “1”, “2”, “4” in the same manner as a normal miss) that does not notify the small hit is made. Stopped and displayed. In the first KT state, when the small hit is won and the small hit game state is controlled, the display of the second specific display and the second hold display is continued (not changed), so that the small hit game state is achieved. Something may be obfuscated. In the first KT state, when a big hit (including a sudden big hit) is won, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the big hit has been won.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (3), in the 100th final change (outfall change) controlled to the first KT state, a special payout display indicating the total payout acquired from the first hit to the present during the change. 85 is displayed. Thereby, the total number of prize balls acquired during the extended villa is displayed. At this time, the number of consecutive villas may be displayed together. Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (4), when the final change of the 100th rotation is completed, the background symbol corresponding to the result of the change display of the second special symbol (for example, a stop symbol indicating a loss (or a small hit)). And the small symbols (eg, “1”, “4”, “9”) stop, and with the end of the first KT state (chance time), the right-handed display ends (becomes non-display), and the player Left-handed notification that prompts left-handed is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the second modification, the special payout display 85 is displayed in the KT state (the first KT state and the second KT state), but is not limited thereto. Absent. For example, in the second KT state, it is possible to acquire a corresponding prize ball by controlling the small hitting game state (that is, the special payout display is added and updated), so that the special payout display 85 is displayed. However, in the first KT state, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball even when the game is controlled to the small hitting game state (that is, the special ball display is not updated). The special payout display 85 may be exceptionally displayed only in the final fluctuation of the item. Alternatively, in the first KT state, the special payout display 85 may be displayed in a mode of low visibility. That is, while the special payout display 85 is always displayed in the second KT state, it is displayed only at the 100th final change in the first KT state, or is displayed in a form with low visibility. The display may be restricted. As described above, the specific payout display 82 is always displayed in the second KT state, but the display is restricted in the first KT state. For this reason, the game value (acquired award ball count) given to the player, including the special ball display 85 and the specific ball display 82, is displayed in the second KT state, whereas the first KT state. Can be limited.

[Award ball addition display]
Next, a display mode of the prize ball number addition display 83 displayed in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. Although the display of the special payout display 85 is omitted in FIG. 72, it is assumed that the display is actually performed in the same manner as the case shown in FIG. 70 (3).

  As shown in FIGS. 72 (1) and (2), when the first and second game balls enter the special winning opening 24 in one small hit opening period, the prize balls correspond to the respective winnings. The number addition display 83 is displayed in a normal addition mode (for example, a small size of black characters). Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (3), when the third or more game balls enter the special winning opening 24 in one small hit opening period, the prize ball number addition display 83 is displayed corresponding to each winning. It is displayed in a special addition mode (for example, medium size of red letters). In FIGS. 72 (1) to 72 (3), the display positions where the number-of-prize-ball addition displays 83 are displayed may be positions that do not overlap each other (or do not overlap even if they partially overlap). . That is, in one small hit opening period, the prize ball number addition display 83 may be displayed at different positions depending on the number of the special prize opening 24 to be awarded. In this way, even if, for example, three game balls win continuously for a short period of time (for example, one second) in the special winning opening 24, the fact that each game ball wins is displayed so as to be distinguishable from each other. Therefore, the display time of the prize ball number addition display 83 according to the winning of one game ball can be set to be long (for example, to 5 seconds), and the more emphasized prize ball number addition display can be executed.

  By the way, the second KT state is a state where it is easy to obtain a corresponding prize ball in the small hit game, and the number of prize balls acquired during this time is displayed as the specific payout display 82, so that the player wins the small hit. When this is done, it is expected that as many game balls as possible can enter the special winning opening 24. On the other hand, in one small hit opening period, the special winning opening 24 is opened only for a short time (for example, 0.8 seconds), so that it is difficult for many game balls to win the special winning opening 24. is there. Therefore, when a predetermined number (three in this case) of game balls wins in one small hit opening period, the award ball addition display 83 corresponding to the winning is highlighted (special addition mode). ) To produce that rare feeling. In the second modification, the predetermined number is set to three. However, the number is not limited to three and may be set as appropriate according to the length of one small hit opening period.

[Small hit combo production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the small hit combo effect performed in the second KT state will be described. Here, the small hit combo effect is an effect of notifying how many times the small hit has been won when the small hit is continuously won over a plurality of variable displays. This is an effect in which a combo display 86 is displayed. Note that, in FIG. 73, the display of the special payout display 85 is omitted, but it is assumed that the display is actually similar to the case shown in FIG. 70 (3).

  As shown in FIG. 73 (1), when the small hit is won in the second KT state and the small change is also won in the next fluctuation display (next fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 73 (2), the effect display device 9 On the upper left of the display screen of the (liquid crystal display device), a small hit combo display 86 (for example, a character display of "during two combos") is displayed to inform that the small hit has been won twice consecutively.

  Further, when the small hit is won in the next fluctuation display (following fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 73 (3A), the small hit combo display 86 displayed at the upper left of the display screen is updated and displayed (for example, “ The display is updated to the character display "3 Combos in progress"). On the other hand, if the small hit is not won in the successive fluctuations (in the case of a normal loss), the display of the small hit combo display 86 ends.

  As described above, in the second modification, the small hit does not always occur when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, when the small hit occurs continuously, the small hit combo display 86 for notifying the fact is provided. Is displayed, the interest of the game is improved. The small hit combo effect shown in FIG. 73 may be realized by the following processing. That is, in the process of step S990 shown in FIG. 54, when there is a continuous small hit, the combo counter is counted up, and the small hit combo display 86 corresponding to the combo counter is set to be displayed, and the process of step S996 in FIG. Is executed, if the small hit combo display 86 is displayed, the non-display setting is performed, and the combo counter may be reset. As described above, in the first KT state, even if a small hit occurs, the fact is not reported, so the small hit combo display 86 is not displayed.

  If a big hit occurs while the small hit combo display 86 is displayed, the combo counter may be reset to hide the small hit combo display 86.

  In the above-described second modification, if a big hit other than the sudden big hit is won while being controlled to the second KT state, the second winning ball number counter is reset, and the update display of the specific payout display 82 ends. To do. That is, the specific payout display 82 indicates the total number of prize balls acquired by one big hit (exactly, not including the sudden big hit in the second KT state) which triggers the control of the second KT state. Instead of straddling the big hits, it is displayed every single big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific payout display 82 may be updated and displayed over a plurality of big hits. Specifically, the specific payout display 82 may be continuously updated and displayed as long as a big hit (a sudden big hit or a 16R certain variable big hit) which is a trigger controlled in the second KT state is won. In this way, it is possible to display the number of prize balls acquired while the jackpot game state and the second KT state continue as the specific payout display 82.

  Further, in the above-described second modification, the specific payout display 82 is continuously displayed when the jackpot is won in the second KT state (the second prize ball number counter is not reset), but is limited to this. Not something. Specifically, in the above-described Modified Example 2, the 16R probability variable jackpot is classified into 16R probability variable jackpot A and 16R probability variable jackpot B. It is assumed that the specific payout display 82 is continuously displayed (not reset) in the same manner as that described above, and that the specific payout display 82 is newly displayed (reset once) when the 16R probability change big hit B is won. Is also good. In this manner, the specific payout display 82 may be continuously displayed not only in the case of the sudden jackpot that is not notified to the player but also in the case of the specific jackpot (16R sure-change jackpot A) that is notified to the player. By doing in this way, even in the same 16R probability change jackpot, the update mode of the specific payout display 82 differs depending on which kind of jackpot is won, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Become.

  Further, the above-described Modification 2 is applied to a gaming machine (a so-called loop machine) controlled in a high probability state at a predetermined rate (60%) until the next big hit, but any big hit is won. However, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine (a so-called ST machine) that is controlled in a high probability state in a predetermined period (ST period; for example, 100 rotations) until a predetermined number of times of variable display is completed. In addition, in the ST machine, as in the above-described modified example 2, as a big hit controlled to the second KT state after the big hit game, a 2R certain variable big hit (probable big hit) in which it is practically difficult to obtain a payout, What is necessary is just to provide at least a big hit (for example, 16R certain-variable big hit) which can acquire a ball. In this way, in this ST machine, when a sudden jackpot is won in the second KT state, the ST period is started from that point in time, but when the ST jackpot is not notified, the ST period ends. It is possible to make it difficult to understand, and it is possible to make it appear as if the ST period has been extended. In addition, as the ST period is extended in this way (that is, as the jackpot is won), the number of prize balls obtained by the small hitting game in the second KT state increases, so that it is not known when to end. The special payout display updated (continuously displayed) makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  In the above-described second modification, the pachinko machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player and the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible. For example, the number of medals paid out to the player during the AT period or the ART period is applied as the specific ball display 82, and the special ball display 85 is a game in a predetermined period including the AT period and the ART period. The total number of medals paid out to the player may be applied.

  Further, in the above-described second modification, the display (special payout display, specific payout display) of the number of balls (number of prize balls) related to payout is performed as the game value given to the player. However, the displayed game value is not limited to the display of the number of payouts (the number of prize balls), and may be, for example, the display of a difference ball. In addition, as a calculating method of the difference ball, the following method is mentioned, for example. As a first method, a launch sensor is provided in the vicinity of a hit ball launching device or in a launch path of a game ball to count the number of game balls fired (the number of actual shots) and calculate the total number of payouts (the number of award balls). The difference can be calculated by subtracting the number of actual shots. As a second method, the number of game balls passing through the out mouth and the winning opening is totaled and calculated as the number of outs, and the number of outs is subtracted from the total number of payouts (the number of award balls) to obtain a difference ball. Can be calculated. As a third method, an out sensor is provided in a discharge passage through which game balls that have entered each of the out mouth and the winning opening, and the number of game balls passing through the out sensor (the number of out sensor passages) is counted. The difference ball can be calculated by subtracting the number of passing out sensors from the total number of payouts (the number of winning balls). Also, when the present invention is applied to a slot machine, a difference ball may be displayed in a similar manner, that is, a difference between IN (the number of inserted medals) and OUT (the number of paid medals) is displayed. It may be. Whether to display the total display of the number of payouts (the number of winning balls) or the total display of difference balls as the game value given to the player may be switchable by an operation of the player, The setting may be switched by a store clerk.

  As described above, according to the second modification, the gaming machine is capable of variably displaying identification information and being controllable in an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. State control means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560) capable of controlling a special state (in this example, non-KT state) and a special state (in this example, KT state) which is more advantageous than the non-special state. , And a specific display (in the present example, a specific payout display 82) relating to the provided game value (in the present example, the number of winning balls) can be displayed. (Steps S976C, S976G, S976K, and S976L in the effect control microcomputer 200 are executed in this example.) ), And the state control means includes, as the special state, a first special state (the first KT state in this example) and a second special state (the second KT state in the present example) which is more advantageous than the first special state. State), the specific display means can display the specific display when controlled to the second special state, and can restrict the specific display when controlled to the first special state ( In this example, see FIG. 68). Thereby, in the gaming machine controllable to the special state, the effect can be improved, and the interest of the game in the special state can be improved.

  Further, according to the second modification, the state is changed into an easy-to-enter state where the game medium easily enters (open state in this example) and a difficult-to-enter state where game medium hardly enters (closed state in this example). A variable starting device that can be changed (in this example, the variable winning ball device 15) and a predetermined variable device that is provided downstream of the variable starting device and through which game media can enter (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22). And a non-specific opening pattern, and a specific opening pattern in which the game medium flows more easily to the predetermined variable device than the non-specific opening pattern. By executing step S26C in the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIGS. 15 (1) and (2), a portion for controlling the variable winning ball device 15 to the open state of 5.5 seconds or 0.2 seconds. ) When controlled to the first special state, the variable starting device is easily controlled in the non-specific opening pattern (in this example, as shown in FIG. 15A, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled for 5.5 seconds). When the game medium is difficult to enter the predetermined variable device, the variable starting device is easily controlled in the specific opening pattern when controlled in the second special state (in this example, FIG. 15). As shown in (2), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for only 0.2 seconds), so that the game medium can easily enter the predetermined variable device. Thereby, the degree of advantage of the special state can be changed by the opening pattern of the variable starting device, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the second modification, the variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) are executed in parallel. Possible variable display executing means (in this example, a part for executing steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560) and variable pattern selecting means for selecting a variable display variable pattern (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560). A part for executing steps S301 and S351 in the computer 560 and a special state control means (in this example, a small hitting game state) which can be controlled to a special state (in this example, a small hitting game state) which is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state. And a portion for executing steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560) based on the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio controlled in the special state is higher than the ratio controlled in the special state based on the variable display of the first identification information (see FIGS. 65 (c) and (d) in this example). The means is configured such that when being controlled in the special state, the change time of the specific change pattern (in this example, FIG. (15 minutes of the second variation pattern # 01 shown in FIG. 13) (in this example, the second variation pattern # 03 in which the variation time is 7 seconds shown in FIG. 13) is easy to select. . Thus, by changing the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the variable display of the second identification information, the degree of advantage can be changed between the special state and the non-special state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the second modification, the special state control means (in this example, the microcontroller for game control in this example) capable of controlling to a special state which is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state (in this example, the small hitting game state). A portion for executing steps S358 to S360 in the computer 560), a predetermined variable device (in this example, the special variable winning ball device 22) into which the game medium can enter when controlled to the special state, and a second special state. When the game is controlled to the special state, the special effect (in this example, the prize ball addition display 83) can be executed every time the game medium enters the predetermined variable device. In the example, a portion for executing steps S657B and S657C in the effect control microcomputer 200), and the specific display means displays the specific display in response to the execution of the special effect. (In this example, to update the display of a specific payout display 82) changes effect of changing the display contents is capable of executing, it was decided. Thereby, the entry of the game medium into the predetermined variable device in the special state can be emphasized, and the interest of the game in the second special state can be improved.

  Further, according to the second modification, the special state control means (in this example, the microcontroller for game control in this example) capable of controlling to a special state which is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state (in this example, the small hitting game state). A portion for executing steps S358 to S360 in the computer 560) and a special effect when the special special state is continuously controlled based on the variable display of the continuous identification information when the special special state is controlled. (In this example, a special effect executing means capable of executing the small hit combo display 86). Thereby, it can be emphasized that the special state has occurred continuously, and the interest of the game in the second special state can be improved.

  Further, according to the second modification, the specific display means is a display different from the specific display (in this example, the specific payout display 82), and corresponds to a predetermined period including the advantageous state and the special state. It is possible to display a special display (in this example, a special payout display 85) related to the provided game value (in this example, the number of prize balls). (In this example, see FIG. 70 (2) and FIG. 71 (3)). As a result, the player can know the game value (the number of prize balls in this example) given in correspondence with the predetermined period, and can improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the second modification, the advantage notification execution means (in this example, the step in the effect control microcomputer 200 in this example) capable of executing an advantage notification (in this example, a jackpot notification effect) related to being controlled to an advantageous state. S976D and S976M are executed), and the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (16R probability variable hit in this example) and a second advantageous state (in this example, lower in the degree of advantage than the first advantageous state). , A sudden big hit) is controlled, the first advantageous state is controlled, the second advantageous state is controlled after the end of the first advantageous state, and the second advantageous state is controlled if the second advantageous state is controlled. Is controlled to the second special state after the end of the processing, and the advantage notification execution means executes the advantage notification relating to the control to the first advantageous state when controlled to the second special state (in this example, 16R A jackpot notification effect based on a variable jackpot is executed), and when controlled to the second special state, execution of an advantage notification relating to being controlled to the second advantageous state is limited (in this example, based on a sudden jackpot) (The big hit announcement effect is not executed). Accordingly, the execution / restriction of the advantage notification changes according to the type of the advantageous state, so that the interest of the game in the second special state can be improved.

  Further, according to the second modification, the signal output means (in this example, it is possible to externally output the advantageous state signal (in this example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) which can specify that it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. A step of executing the same processing as step S2015X in the step S2015X and the second special symbol stop processing in the game control microcomputer 560), and the signal output means is the first advantageous state when the signal output means is controlled to the second special state. When the state is controlled, the advantageous state signal is externally output, and when the state is controlled to the second special state, the advantageous state signal is not externally output when the state is controlled to the second advantageous state. As a result, since the advantageous state signal matched to the content of the advantage notification can be output to the outside, the interest of the game is not reduced by the content of the external output.

  Further, according to the second modification, the advantageous state includes the specific advantageous state (in this example, 16R ordinary big hit) and the special advantageous state (in this example, sudden big hit) having different degrees of advantage, and the specific display. The means, when being controlled to the special state, displays a specific display (for example, a specific payout display 82) relating to the game value (in this example, the number of prize balls) provided in correspondence with the special state, When the display is controlled to the special state, the specific display is terminated when the display is controlled to the specific advantageous state, and when the display is controlled to the special state, the display is continued when the display is controlled to the special advantageous state (in this example, FIG. 70 (4) to (7)). Thereby, the continuation / end of the specific display changes according to the type of the advantageous state, and thus the interest of the game in the special state can be improved.

  Also, in the present embodiment and the first and second modifications, a case is shown in which the low probability / first KT state is configured to end based on executing the variable display a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times). However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the second KT state (in this example, high probability / second KT state) may also be configured to end based on executing the variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, for example, it may be configured to shift from the first KT state to the second KT state based on the execution of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays, and conversely, the second KT state may be configured based on the execution of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays. It may be configured to shift from the state to the first KT state.

  Further, in this embodiment and Modifications 1 and 2, a case has been described in which a plurality of big hit types are provided only for big hits, but a plurality of small hit types are provided for small hits. Good. In this case, for example, the opening time of the special variable prize ball device 22 or the like is different depending on the small hit type, or the variable prize ball device to be opened is different depending on the small hit type. This may be configured so that the degree of advantage differs depending on the small hit type. When the variable winning prize ball devices to be opened are configured to be different, for example, there is a case where the special variable prize ball device 20 is opened or a case where the special variable prize ball device 22 is opened according to the small hit type. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of special variable winning prize ball devices for small hits are provided, and which special variable winning prize ball device is opened according to the small hit type is different.

  In this embodiment and Modifications 1 and 2, the state shifts to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state) mainly in the case of the 16R probability variable hit, and to the high probability / second time in the case of the 6R probability variable hit or the 2R probability variable hit. Although the case where the state shifts to the 1KT state and shifts to the low probability / first KT state in the case of the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the same jackpot type may be configured so that there is both a case of transition to the first KT state and a case of transition to the second KT state. In this case, for example, even in the case of the same 6R probability variable jackpot or 6R normal jackpot, it may be configured so that there is both a case of shifting to the first KT state and a case of shifting to the second KT state.

  In this embodiment and the first and second modifications, the KT state is internally controlled. However, when the KT state is controlled, a small hit occurs. Although it becomes easier, the prize does not rarely occur in the special winning opening 24, and when viewed from the player, it looks substantially the same as being controlled to a so-called high base state. Therefore, it is possible to realize the same gaming properties as a gaming machine controlled to a so-called high base state, not to give a sense of incongruity to a player, and to realize a plurality of types of KT states having different degrees of advantage. , It is possible to improve game entertainment.

  In the above-described embodiment and Modifications 1 and 2, “different ratios” mean that the ratios are different due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. The concept includes not only things but also things with different ratios in a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation). is there.

  In the above-described embodiment and Modifications 1 and 2, for example, when a plurality of types of special symbols such as “1” to “9”, background symbols (effect symbols), and ordinary symbols are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. However, the variable display is not limited to such a mode. For example, the symbol variably displayed and the symbol derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol different from the symbol variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, variable display may be performed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Also in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be something.

  In the above-described embodiment and Modifications 1 and 2, the effect control board 80, the sound output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which circuits for controlling the effect devices are mounted. A circuit for controlling the device may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a first effect control board on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) are mounted. Two boards including two effect control boards may be provided.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment and Modifications 1 and 2, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command directly to the effect control microcomputer 200. However, the game control microcomputer 560 has another The board (for example, the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 4, or a sound provided with the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35) / Ramp board), and may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 in the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control unit such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control unit receives the command. In response to this, control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is directly or changed to, for example, a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 200 for controlling the effect display device 9. May be transmitted. Even in such a case, the effect control microcomputer 200 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment, as well as the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the above-described embodiment and Modifications 1 and 2, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. When a combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when a plurality of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the stop button by the player and the player stops the symbol, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible to apply to a slot machine to be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment and the first and second modifications, the example in which the game medium is used as the game machine is described as an example. The present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention can also be applied to an enclosure-type gaming machine that encloses a game medium such as a game ball and gives a score when a condition for giving a prize is satisfied.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment and the first and second modifications, the jackpot type includes the probable variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, and based on the fact that the jackpot type is determined to be the probable jackpot, the jackpot type is controlled to the changed state after the end of the jackpot game. Although a gaming machine has been shown, it is not limited to such gaming machines. For example, a special variable prize ball device provided with a predetermined variable region therein (a variable variable prize ball device may be provided in only one special variable prize ball device, or a plurality of special variable prize balls may be provided. A probability change area may be provided in a part of the device), the probability change is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability change area in the special variable prize ball device during the big hit game, and the big hit game The configuration described in the above embodiment can be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to the probable change state after the end.

  The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

DESCRIPTION OF REFERENCE NUMERALS 1 pachinko gaming machine 8a first special symbol display 8b second special symbol display 9 effect display device 9a first variable display portion 9b second variable display portion 9c background symbol display portion 13 first start winning opening 13a first start opening Switch 14 Second starting winning opening 14a Second starting opening switch 15 Variable winning ball device 17 Operating gate 17a Operating gate switch 18c Symbol hold storage display section 20 Special variable winning ball device 22 Special variable winning ball device 23 Bottom member 24 Special winning opening 23a first count switch 25a second count switch 31 main board 32 gate 56 CPU
80 effect control board 200 effect control microcomputer 201 effect control CPU
560 Game control microcomputer

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information and is controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to the player and a predetermined state advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state ,
Non-special state, state control means that can be controlled to a special state more advantageous than the non-special state,
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display relating to the provided game value;
In the variable display when being controlled to the special state, notification effect executing means capable of executing an information effect for notifying the result of the variable display,
A variable means that allows a game medium to enter when being controlled to the predetermined state;
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in response to a game medium entering the variable means while being controlled to the predetermined state ,
The advantageous state includes a specific advantageous state and a special advantageous state having different degrees of advantage,
The state control means is advantageous in that the special state is more advantageous than the first special state and the first special state, and is more easily controlled to the predetermined state than the non-special state. Two special states can be controlled,
The specific display means,
Wherein when it is controlled to the second special state, to display a specific indication as to the game value granted in response to the second special state,
Can said is controlled to a particular advantageous state if it is controlled to the second special state terminates the specific display,
It can and said controlled in particularly advantageous conditions when it is controlled by the second special state continues the specific display,
The notification effect execution means,
In the variable display when being controlled to the second special state, in the case of being controlled to the predetermined state, executing a predetermined notification effect for notifying that it is controlled to the predetermined state as the notification effect,
In the variable display when being controlled to the first special state, when controlled to the predetermined state, does not execute the predetermined notification effect as the notification effect,
In the variable display when being controlled to the second special state, when controlled to the special advantageous state, executes a common effect with the predetermined notification effect,
The predetermined effect execution means,
When being controlled to the predetermined state while being controlled to the second special state, the predetermined effect is executed,
Does not execute the predetermined effect when controlled to the predetermined state while being controlled to the first special state;
A gaming machine characterized by that:   A variable starting means capable of changing the state between an easy-to-enter state where the game medium is easy to enter and a difficult-to-enter state where the game medium is difficult to enter;
  Variable starting means control means capable of controlling the state of the variable starting means,
  The variable means is provided downstream of the variable starting means,
  The variable starting means control means,
    With a non-specific opening pattern and a specific opening pattern in which the game medium flows more easily to the variable means than the non-specific opening pattern, it is possible to control the state of the variable starting means,
    When being controlled to the first special state, the ratio of controlling the state of the variable starting means with the non-specific opening pattern is higher than the specific opening pattern,
    When controlled to the second special state, the ratio of controlling the state of the variable starting means in the specific opening pattern is higher than the non-specific opening pattern,
  The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: